Top Banner
N E C I T 3 5 2 0 / I T 2 5 2 0 O P E R A T I O N S M A N U A L Issue 2
465

IT3520_2520 User Manual

Oct 30, 2014

Download

Documents

bramirez8098
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC

IT3520/IT2520

OPERATIONS

MANUAL

Issue 2

Page 2: IT3520_2520 User Manual
Page 3: IT3520_2520 User Manual

Operations ManualNEC America, Inc.

Document Solutions

CC56001

Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520

Page 4: IT3520_2520 User Manual
Page 5: IT3520_2520 User Manual

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice at the discretion ofNEC America, Inc. This document has been prepared for the use of employees andcustomers of NEC America, Inc. and may not be reproduced without prior writtenapproval of NEC America, Inc.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Copyright 2003

NEC America, Inc.6535 N. State Highway 161

Irving, TX 75039-2402

Document Solutions

Page 6: IT3520_2520 User Manual
Page 7: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1

Regulatory and Safety

Information

SECTION 1 REGULATORY INFORMATION

The following information provides data for using this product on the Public SwitchedTelephone Network, as required by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC).

1.1 FCC Notification

This product complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations. On thebottom of this product is a label that contains, among other information, theFCC Registration number and the Ringer Equivalence Number (REN). Ifrequested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.

This product uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C

The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that can be connectedto the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in thedevices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas,the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain the number ofdevices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs,contact the telephone company servicing your area to ensure the REN is notexceeded.

If this product causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone companywill notify you in advance. If advanced notice isn’t practical, the telephonecompany will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will beadvised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it isnecessary.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, product,operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of this product. If thishappens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for youto make any necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterruptedservice.

If trouble is experienced with this product, please contact NEC America, Inc.1-800-232-9632 for repair and (or) warranty information. If the trouble iscausing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may requestyou to remove the product from the network until the problem is resolved.

Page 8: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 Regulatory and Safety Information

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

The following maintenance can be performed by the customer:

� Document Jam

� Print Paper Jam

� Installing Print Paper

� Replacing the spare TX Marker Stamp

� Others

This product cannot be used on telephone company provided coin-op service.A connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs.

If a telephone set is to be used with this product, insure that it meets FCC Part68 for Hearing Aid compatibility.

When programming and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, pleaseremember to:

� Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason forthe call.

� Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning orlate evening.

This product generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installedand used properly, that is, in strict accordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It hasbeen type-tested and found to comply within the limits for a Class A computingdevice in accordance with the specifications in subpart J of Part 15 of the FCCRules and Regulations. Part 15 is designed to provide reasonable protectionagainst such interference in a residential installation. However, there is noguarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If thisproduct does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can bedetermined by turning the product off and on, the user is encouraged to try tocorrect the interference by one or more of the following measures:

� Reorient the receiving antenna.

� Relocate the facsimile with respect to the receiver.

� Move the facsimile away from the receiver.

� Plug the facsimile into a different power outlet so that the facsimile andthe receiver are on different branch circuits.

Page 9: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3

1.2 Industry Canada Notification

Certification Number: 140 11281 A

Complies with: CP-01, Issue 8, Part I

Ringer Equivalence Number: 0.4

Connector: CA 11A

The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. The certificationmeans that the equipment meets certain telecommunications networkprotective, operational, and safety requirements. The department does notguarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.

Before installing the equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible tobe connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. Theequipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection.In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single lineindividual service may be extended by means of a certified connectorassembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware thatcompliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of servicein some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadianmaintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or installationsmade by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give thetelecommunications company cause to request that the user disconnect theequipment.

For their own protection, users should ensure that the electrical groundconnections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic waterpipe system, if present, are connected together. This protection may beparticularly important in rural areas.

CAUTION 1: Users should not attempt to make such connectionsthemselves, but should contact the appropriate electricalinspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.

As an ENERGY STAR® partner, NECCorporation has determined that thisproduct meets the ENERGY STAR®

guidelines for energy efficiency.

ENERGY STAR® is a U.S. registeredmark.

Page 10: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 Regulatory and Safety Information

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

CAUTION 2: The act of monitoring or recording telephoneconversations under certain circumstances may violatefederal or state statutes. Consultation with your legalcounsel prior to engaging in such practices would beadvisable.

NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminaldevice provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed tobe connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface mayconsist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that thesum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five (5.0).

Safety Certifications

This equipment has been listed by Underwriters Laboratories and found tocomply with all the applicable requirements of the standard for telephoneequipment U.L. 1950.

This equipment complies with CSA standard C22.2 No. 225.

1.3 Laser Classification and Safety

� Laser Safety

This product is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S.Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) radiationperformance standard, according to the Radiation Control For HealthAnd Safety Act of 1968. This means that this product does not producehazardous laser radiation.

Since radiation emitted inside this product is completely contained withinprotective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escapefrom the machine during any phase of user operation.

� Internal Laser Radiation

This is a Class IIIB laser diode assembly that has a visually invisiblelaser beam. The print head assembly (laser) is not a field service item;therefore, the print head should not be opened under any circumstance.

ProductMaximum Radiation

PowerWavelength

IT3520 28.9 uW 770 nm to 795 nm

IT2520 28.9 uW 770 nm to 795 nm

Page 11: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5

� Classification of the Laser Product

This product is classified as a Class 1 laser product under the CDRHregulations of the USA.

1.4 CDRH Regulations

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food andDrug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2,1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1,1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.The label shown in the following illustration indicates compliance with theCDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in theUnited States.

Laser access window

When the side cover is opened and the imaging unit is removed.

Use of controls, adjustments, or performance ofprocedures other than those specified in this manualmay result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Page 12: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 Regulatory and Safety Information

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

1.5 Transmitter Subscriber’s Identification

As of December 20, 1992, the Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991requires that the following information must be included in the top margin ofeach page of the facsimile transmission:

� The date and time the facsimile was sent.

� The name of the business or company.

� The facsimile telephone number of the sending machine.

� It is illegal to turn off the TSI feature.

This facsimile machine meets these requirements by including this informationwithin the Transmitter’s Station Identification (TSI).

Please refer to Section 1.7 Required Initial Registration/Settings andConfirmation in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-4,and Section 2.6 Registering the Transmitter Subscriber’s Identification (TSI) inChapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-19 for instructionson programming the TSI and the date and time. It is most important to alwayskeep the TSI feature turned on when sending a document.

Page 13: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 7

SECTION 2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

2.1 Installation Space

Sufficient space must be provided to enable normal operation, routine checks,replacement of consumables, and to perform routine maintenance on theproduct.

2.2 Using this Product

The following items describe general areas of product usage by the end-user.

� Conditions on Installation and Use

The following list provides safety warnings for properly operating themachine. Please adhere to these guidelines, as serious injury ormachine failure may occur.

� There is a ventilation duct on the back of the unit. A gap of at leastfour inches (100 mm) must be maintained.

� The figures above represent the dimensions when the optionalassemblies are mounted.

Page 14: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 Regulatory and Safety Information

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Warnings

Stop using this product immediately if smoke or an abnormal odor is coming from the unit.

Failure to do so may result in a fire, electricshock, or product failure. Disconnect the powerplug from the wall outlet immediately, andcontact the dealer for service.

Do not place small metal objects orcontainers filled with liquids on top of theunit. Items such as paper clips, chemicals,cosmetics, drinking glasses, flower vases,etc. can harm the machine.

Using the items above may result in fire ormachine damage, if liquids or metal objects dropinto the unit.

Stop using this product immediately if thisproduct is dropped or any cover is damaged.

Failure to do so may result in a fire, electricshock, or product failure. Disconnect the powerplug from the wall outlet immediately, andcontact the dealer for service.

Do not disassemble or remodel this product.

Failure to do so may result in a fire, electricshock, or product failure. Also, damage to youreyesight may occur if the laser is serviced.Contact the service center or dealer for anyinternal checks and repairs available if there areno appropriate instructions in this manual.

Stop using this product immediately if wateror any metal object is dropped inside theproduct.

Failure to do so may result in a fire, electricshock, or product failure. Disconnect the powerplug from the wall outlet immediately, andcontact the dealer for service.

Take care not to damage the power cord inany manner. Do not twist, heat, forcibly pull,or place heavy objects on this cord.

Such action may result in a fire or electric shock.

Do not unplug the power cord with wethands.

Such action may result in an electric shock dueto electrical discharge.

High voltage is used inside this product. Donot remove any of the covers.

Such action may result in electric shock.

Do not operate the product or install anymachine options during a thunderstorm.

Such actions may result in an electric shock orproduct failure.

Do not touch the toner fixing unit locatedinside the machine, or the area around it, asit becomes extremely hot.

Some areas are hot enough to cause seriousburn injury.

This is a warning that indicates a hazard that can lead toserious injury or death.

Page 15: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 9

Cautions

Do not place the product in direct sunlight ornear a heater.

Such an environment may cause product failureor even a fire due to extreme temperaturesinside the machine chassis.

Do not place the product on an unevensurface, or somewhere that is subject tovibration or mechanical instability.

Such an environment may cause injury or failureif the product falls down or tips over.

Do not place the product in a humid, dusty,smoky, or steamy environment.

Such an environment may cause product failureor poor performance in the scanning and printingmechanisms.

The ground cable must be connected.

In certain cases, a ground cable should beconnected to an independent earth ground. Donot connect the ground to a gas pipe, lightningrod, water pipe, or a telephone ground.

Do not cover the ventilation grille on theproduct.

If this grille is blocked or covered, internaltemperature will rise and may cause productfailure.

Hold the solid plug when disconnecting thepower cord.

The power cord should be disconnected byholding and pulling on the solid plug part and noton the cord itself. Pulling on the cord may causepower cord damage, resulting in a fire or electricshock.

Care must be taken not to catch your fingersor clothes when closing the cover.

Some surfaces are sharp or pointed, which mayresult in injury to person or clothing.

Lift the product in the positions indicatedwhen transporting the product.

Lifting the product using any other area mayresult in injury to person or product damage.

This is a caution that indicates a hazard that can lead to injury ordamage to property.

Page 16: IT3520_2520 User Manual

10 Regulatory and Safety Information

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Before moving the product, first disconnectthe power cord and telephone/facsimile lineconnection.

Failure to do so may damage the power cordand line cable.

Do not place the power cord near a heater.

This may cause the power cord to melt, thusexposing internal wiring that can cause fire or anelectric shock.

Do not touch the inside of the side cover orthe copper terminals located at the lower partof the imaging unit.

Doing so may result in product failure due tostatic discharge.

For product and property safety reasons,disconnect the power cord from the walloutlet when this product is not to be used forprolonged periods.

Doing so will avoid the possibility of fire orproduct failure.

Recommendations

Do not place the product in an excessivelyhot (over 87 degrees F) or cold (less than 27degrees F) environment.

Doing so may result in erratic operation.

Do not place the product in a location wherechemical vapors are emitted.

Doing so may damage the product or causeimproper operation.

Do not install the product in a location that issubject to excessive vibration.

Doing so may cause improper operation orproduct damage.

Do not operate this product near otherdevices that are affected by electromagneticradiation (such as a radio or television).

This product complies within the limits for a FCCPart 15 Class A digital device. If this product isused in a residential location, it may causeelectromagnetic interference. In this case, theuser is asked to take appropriate measures tominimize the interference.

Do not place the product in a location that issubject to significant temperature changes(such as near an air conditioner or heater).

Doing so may cause improper product operationdue to excess temperature variations andincreased condensation in the product.

Do not use a hard or pointed object to pressthe Touch Panel.

Doing so may permanently damage the panel.

Cautions

This is a recommendation that indicates a certain procedureshould be followed for proper performance.

Page 17: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 11

Do not open any covers while the product isoperating.

Doing so will suspend operations and may causea paper jam.

Do not lean or place any heavy objects on theOperation Panel.

Doing so may result in Operation Panel failure.

Do not place any other objects on the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray except copypapers.

Doing so may damage the Multi-purpose ManualBypass Tray.

Recommendations

Cautions on Power Supply

Warnings

Use only on U.S. standard 120V AC power.

Using any other voltagesource can cause productfailure or fire.

Do not use this product in countries otherthan the United States and Canada, as theproduct is designed for use in thesecountries only.

Use in other countries can cause fire, electricshock, and damage to the internal power supplybecause of voltage differences. Alsocommunication problems can occur because ofdifferent telephone line parameters.

This product must be plugged into its ownindependent wall outlet circuit.

Do not plug the power cord into a wall outlet thatis also powering devices such as airconditioners, copiers, or refrigerators, etc. Doingso can cause improper operation due to powersurges caused by the other device.

The wall outlet must be able to handle theamount of current to properly operate theproduct.

The wall outlet circuit must be capable ofproviding 10 amperes, or more, for properoperation.

This is a warning that indicates a hazard that can lead to seriousinjury or death.

Page 18: IT3520_2520 User Manual

12 Regulatory and Safety Information

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Toner Bottle and Imaging Unit

Cautions

Do not throw used toner bottles or imagingunits into an incinerator or fire.

The toner is highly flammable and can cause afire to spread quickly.

This is a caution that indicates a hazard that can lead to injury ordamage to property.

Recommendations

Only use toner bottles and imaging unitsspecified by NEC America, Inc.

Use of unauthorized parts and consummablesmay result in unit failure or a reduction in printquality. In certain cases, this may also void themachine’s warranty.

Do not store a toner bottle or imaging unit inthe following environments: Hot, humid ordusty areas; areas near direct flame; areasin direct sunlight; areas near magneticallysensitive objects (such as floppy disks, etc.);in a vehicle or area where extremetemperature variations can occur.

Doing so can result in poor print quality.

Do not open the wrapping of the toner bottleor imaging unit until it is to be used.

Doing so can result in poor print quality.

Do not store a toner bottle or imaging unitupright or upside down.

Doing so can result in print failures.

Make sure the toner bottle or imaging unit isnot dropped or thrown.

Doing so can result in unit failure and/or poorprint quality.

Do not touch or scratch the surface of theimaging unit’s photosensitive parts.

Doing so can result in unit failure or poor printquality.

This is a recommendation that indicates a certain procedureshould be followed for proper performance.

Page 19: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 13

Print Paper

Recommendations

Only use the types specified by NECAmerica, Inc. Do not use wrinkled, folded,damp paper, or paper that has already beenprinted on.

This can result in poor print quality or machinefailure. For details concerning which types ofpaper to use, consult your dealer.

Paper Storage

Even paper that meets the required standardswill deteriorate if stored improperly. Adeterioration in paper quality may result in failureof the paper feed mechanisms, a print paperjam, or reduction in overall print quality.

The following items should be kept in mind whenstoring print paper:

• Be sure to store the paper in a dry, lowhumidly environment.

• Do not unwrap a ream of paper until it isready for use. The wrapping helps keep outmoisture.

• Store the paper on a flat surface.• Do not store the paper at floor level, as

humidity is generally higher at that location.• Make sure that paper is not folded or curled

when stored.• Do not store reams of paper on their ends,

or stack too high.• Do not store paper in areas of direct sunlight

or in places subject to large temperaturevariations.

• If the paper is exposed to areas of highhumidity, leave the paper (while still in thewrapper) in the area it is to be used for aday, or more. This will assist condition thepaper to the proper environment.

This is a recommendation that indicates a certain procedureshould be followed for proper performance.

Page 20: IT3520_2520 User Manual

14 Regulatory and Safety Information

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Other Conditions of Use

OthersNormal international communications maysometimes not be possible depending on thetelephone line status.

Many times international facsimilecommunication is affected by various noise onthe telephone line. Items such as echoes, static,timing problems, etc., can degrade a facsimilecommunication. Many times the problem iscorrected when the unit interrupts a connectionand redials the destination.

The cooling fan comes on intermittently.

The product’s cooling fan is connected to athermostat. When the internal temperatureraises to a certain level, the cooling fan isengaged to circulate cool air throughout the unit.

Ventilate the area.

Ozone is produced as a normal by-product of theprinter engine. The quantity of ozone is wellbelow the level that is harmful to your health.However, the odor produced may be unpleasantif the unit is in an area with poor ventilation. Insuch cases, be sure to properly maintainventilation in the room containing the machine.

If a Humidifier is used.

If tap or well water is used in a room humidifier,impurities in the water are discharged into theroom’s air supply. This can cause deposits tobuild up inside the print engine and may causepoor print quality. It is recommended to only usedistilled water which contains only minutequantities of impurities.

When using 2-Sided Copying.

If 2-Sided Copying is executed with the DuplexUnit, paper printed on one side is ejected ontothe tray. This paper is then automaticallyinserted to print on the other side of the paper.The purpose of this operation is to turn over thepaper and is not a malfunction.

Do not pull out or touch the paper that is printedon one side and ejected onto the tray.Otherwise, copying may not be completedproperly, or a paper jam or other failure mayoccur.

Page 21: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 15

SECTION 3 LEGAL RESTRICTIONS TO COPYING

Copying of the following items are forbidden under certain circumstances. The list isnot all inclusive and no liability is assumed for its completeness or accuracy. In caseof doubt, consult an attorney.

� Obligations or Securities of the Unites States Government, such as:

Bonds and obligations of certain agencies of the government such as FHA, etc.

Bonds. (US Savings Bonds may be photographed only for publicity purposes inconnection with the campaign for the sale of such bonds.)

Internal Revenue Stamps. (If it is necessary to copy a legal document on whichthere is a canceled revenue stamp, this may be done provided the reproduction ofthe document is performed for lawful purposes.)

Postage Stamps - canceled or uncanceled. (For philatelic purposes, postagestamps may be photographed provided the reproduction is in black and white andis less than 3/4 or more than 1-1/2 times the linear dimensions of the original.)

Postal Money Orders.

Bills, Checks, or Drafts for Money drawn by or upon authorized officers of theUnited States.

Stamps and other representatives of value, of whatever denomination, which havebeen or may be issued under any Act of Congress.

� Adjusted Compensation Certificates for War Veterans.

� Obligations or Securities of any Foreign Government, bank, or Corporation.

� Copyrighted material, unless permission of the copyright owner has been obtained or the copyright falls within the "fair use" or library reproduction rights provisions of the copyright law. Further information of these provisions may be obtained from the Copyright Office, Library of Congress, Washington, D.C. 20559. Ask for Circular R21.

� Certificates of Citizenship or Naturalization. (Foreign Naturalization Certificates may be photographed.)

� Passports. (Foreign passports may be photographed.)

Certificates of IndebtednessNational Bank CurrencyCoupons from Bonds

United States BondsTreasury NotesFederal Reserve Notes

Federal Reserve Bank NotesSilver CertificatesGold Certificates

Fractional NotesCertificates of DepositPaper Money

Page 22: IT3520_2520 User Manual

16 Regulatory and Safety Information

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� Immigration Papers.

� Draft Registration Cards.

� Selective Service Induction Papers which bear any of the following information:

� Badges, Identification Cards, Passes, or Insignia carried by Military, Naval personnel, or by members of the various Federal departments and bureaus, such as FBI, CIA, Treasury, etc. (unless a photograph is ordered by the head of such department or bureau.)

Copying the following is also prohibited in certain states: Automobile Licenses,Drivers’ Licenses, and Automobile Certificates of Title.

Registrant’s earnings or incomeRegistrant’s dependency statusRegistrant’s Court recordExceptions: U.S. Army and Navy discharge certificates may be photographed.

Registrant’s previous military serviceRegistrant’s physical or mental condition

Page 23: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 17

Please check that the following accessories are enclosed before starting operations.Please order consumables from your NEC authorized dealer when they run out.

Accessories

Operation Manual 1

Quick Reference Guide 1

Telephone line cord 1

Power cord 1

Print paper size label 1 set

Imaging Unit 1

Consumables

Imaging Unit

Toner bottle

Spare TX Marker Stamp (for optional TX Marker Stamp)

Staples (for optional Finisher)

Staples/Saddle (for optional Finisher Saddle/Folding kit)

Useful Information

Page 24: IT3520_2520 User Manual

18 Regulatory and Safety Information

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Specifications

Product Number IT3520 IT2520

Communication standard

G3

Applicable communication lines

Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)

Standard cassette Universal cassette x 2

Paper Sizes

Universal Cassette: 11x17, 11x14, Legal, Letter, Letter(Landscape), 5 1/2 x 8 1/2

Large Capacity Cabinet (*1): Letter

Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray: 11x17, Legal, Letter, Letter(Landscape), 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 (Landscape)

Paper types Standard paper (50 to 105g/m2), Recycled paper, Card (91 to 210gm2), OHP sheets

Recording system Electronic photographic recording system

Power requirements 120VAC, 50/60Hz, 10A

Power consumption

Stand-by/Power Saving Mode :approx. 7WTransmission Mode :approx. 41WReception Mode :approx. 41WCopying Mode :approx. 680WMaximum :approx. 1100W

Stand-by/Power Saving Mode :approx. 7WTransmission Mode :approx. 41WReception Mode :approx. 41WCopying Mode :approx. 590WMaximum :approx. 1000W

External dimensions 677 x 710 x 860mm (WxDxH)

Weight 170 lbs (77kg)

Required environment Temperature: 27.1oF (10oC) to 87.8oF (31oC)Humidity: 15 to 80%

DC resistance 298 ohms

Ni-MH battery for memory back-up

Voltage: 4.8VCapacity: 650mAh (*2)

(*1) Optional

(*2) The Ni-MH battery for memory back-up should not be replaced by the user. Contact your service center for replacement in case of failure.

Page 25: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 19

The following optional parts are available for the NEC IT3520/IT2520. These allow formore efficient and convenient operation.

� Optional Memory Board32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB - This memory option increases the document storagecapacity. This is convenient when scanning and copying large volumes ofdocuments. It also allows for more received document storage, if the machineshould run out of print paper.

� Paper Feed CabinetsUp to four layers of cassettes, including two standard cassettes, can be installed.

� 2-Step Copy DeskOptional 2-Step Copy Desk allow for height adjustments.

� Duplex UnitAllows printing on both sides of the print paper. Ideal for reports, books, andpublications, etc.

� Job SeparatorOffers sorting by the user designating which tray gets copier output and which traygets facsimile printed output.

� Switchback UnitThis unit has to be installed when the Duplex Unit and/or the Job Separator isequipped with the machine.

� Built-in FinisherEnables sorting, stapling, hole punching, and folding.

� Punch KitPunches holes in the paper. Can be equipped with the Built-in Finisher.

Types of Paper Cassettes Paper Capacity

Paper Feed Cabinet (1) 550 sheet cassette with one empty drawer

2-Way Paper Feed Cabinet

(2) 550 sheet cassettes

Large Capacity Cabinet 2, 750 sheets

Options

Page 26: IT3520_2520 User Manual

20 Regulatory and Safety Information

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� Saddle/Folding KitEnables saddle stapling and folding of pages. Can be equipped with the Built-inFinisher. Cannot be used with the Mail-Bins Kit.

� Mail-Bin KitAutomatically sorts the printed output from the printer. Can be equipped with theBuilt-in Finisher. Cannot be used with the Saddle/Folding Kit.

� Additional Bin KitThis tray automatically sorts the printed output from the printer. Can be equippedwith the Built-in Finisher.

� Mechanical CounterA six-digit counter for printed page count. This is an additional counter to theinternal soft counter.

� Network Interface CardNeeded to use the PC printing function and network application function. Alsoprovides a USB interface for local PC printing.

� Network Application KitOffers network scanner feature and Internet fax feature. Cannot be used with theOptional Memory Board.

� Network Application Kit with MemoryOffers network scanner feature and Internet fax feature. Includes 96MB memory.Cannot be used with the Optional Memory Board.

� Printer Controller (PCL)Offers PC printing (PCL) and available network printing. Drivers includeintegration to available finishing options.

� Printer Controller (PCL/PS)Offers PC printing (PCL/PS) and available network printing. Drivers includeintegration to available finishing options.

� Second G3 PortA second facsimile line can be installed, allowing the convenience and efficiencyof simultaneous sending and receiving.

� TX Marker Stamp UnitThe TX Marker stamps a small red mark on the document, showing the user thatthe individual pages were successfully scanned into memory.

Page 27: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual i

Table of Contents

Regulatory and Safety Information

Section 1 Regulatory Information .................................................................. 1

1.1 FCC Notification ........................................................................................ 1

1.2 Industry Canada Notification ..................................................................... 3

1.3 Laser Classification and Safety ................................................................. 4

1.4 CDRH Regulations .................................................................................... 5

1.5 Transmitter Subscriber’s Identification ...................................................... 6

Section 2 Safety Precautions ......................................................................... 7

2.1 Installation Space ...................................................................................... 7

2.2 Using this Product ..................................................................................... 7

Section 3 Legal Restrictions To Copying .................................................... 15

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Section 1 Product Overview ........................................................................1-1

Section 2 Names and Functions of Parts ...................................................1-3

Section 3 Operation Panel and Touch Panel .............................................1-9

3.1 Operation Panel ...................................................................................... 1-9

3.2 Touch Panel ......................................................................................... 1-12

3.3 Stand-by Screen (Initial Screen) ........................................................... 1-15

3.4 Accessibility Settings Feature ............................................................... 1-22

3.5 Account and Account Management Mode ............................................ 1-27

Page 28: IT3520_2520 User Manual

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

ii Table of Contents

Section 4 How to use the Copier and Facsimile (Auto-mode Screen) .. 1-30

Section 5 Handling Documents ................................................................ 1-31

5.1 Using the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) .....................................1-31

5.2 Using the Book Scanner .......................................................................1-32

5.3 Notes on Handling Documents .............................................................1-33

Section 6 Quitting an Operation ............................................................... 1-36

Section 7 Interrupting an Operation ......................................................... 1-38

7.1 Interrupting ............................................................................................1-38

Section 8 Confirming the Settings ........................................................... 1-39

Section 9 Routine Care .............................................................................. 1-53

9.1 Installing Print Paper .............................................................................1-53

9.2 Installing and Replacing the Toner Bottle .............................................1-60

9.3 Installing and Replacing the Spare Transmission (TX) Marker Stamp .1-65

9.4 Installing and Adding Staples ...............................................................1-67

9.5 Cleaning ................................................................................................1-74

Chapter 2 Copy Operations

Section 1 Basic Copy Operations .............................................................. 2-1

1.1 Copying with the Automatic Document Feeder ......................................2-2

1.2 Copying with the Book Scanner ..............................................................2-3

1.3 Memory Recall ........................................................................................2-5

1.4 Selecting the Copy Paper Size for Copying ............................................2-7

1.5 Paper Size Reset ..................................................................................2-14

1.6 Selecting the Zoom Ratio for Copying ..................................................2-14

Page 29: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual iii

1.7 Selecting the Zoom Ratio ..................................................................... 2-15

1.8 Zoom Selections Available ................................................................ 2-17

1.9 Registering the Zoom Ratio .................................................................. 2-19

1.10 Using the Registered Zoom Ratio for Copying ..................................... 2-20

1.11 Zoom Ratio Reset ................................................................................. 2-20

1.12 Adjusting the Density for Copying ........................................................ 2-20

1.13 Making the Choice for Density Selection .............................................. 2-22

1.14 Density Setting Reset ........................................................................... 2-22

1.15 Copying Figures and Photos ............................................................. 2-23

1.16 Image Quality Setting Reset ................................................................. 2-24

Section 2 Advanced Copy Operations .....................................................2-25

2.1 Using the Sort Mode While Copying ..................................................... 2-25

2.2 Stapled Binding .................................................................................... 2-28

2.3 Hole Punching ...................................................................................... 2-32

2.4 Setting a Crease ................................................................................... 2-35

2.5 Mixed Size Original Document Detection ............................................. 2-37

2.6 Selecting the Document and Copy Format (Orig.�Copy Screen) ....... 2-39

2.7 Selecting Formats for Various Original Documents .............................. 2-46

2.8 Selecting the Various Copy Formats .................................................... 2-48

2.9 Attaching Cover Sheets to Copies ........................................................ 2-55

2.10 Inserting Separators (Page Insertion) ................................................... 2-58

2.11 Copying and Overhead Projector Interleaving ...................................... 2-60

2.12 Setting Up File Margins ........................................................................ 2-62

2.13 Erasing a Portion of the Document ....................................................... 2-64

2.14 Repeated Copying on a Single Sheet .................................................. 2-66

2.15 Numbering Each Set of Copies ............................................................ 2-69

Page 30: IT3520_2520 User Manual

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

iv Table of Contents

2.16 Printing a Water Mark on the Copy Paper ............................................2-71

2.17 Black-White Reverse Copying ..............................................................2-73

2.18 Separate Scanning ...............................................................................2-73

2.19 Using Copy Programs ...........................................................................2-76

Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations

Section 1 General Information .................................................................... 3-1

1.1 Describing the Registration and Setting Screens ...................................3-1

1.2 User Set Screen .....................................................................................3-2

1.3 Copy Job Program Recall Screen ..........................................................3-2

1.4 User Management Screen ......................................................................3-3

1.5 Administrator Management Screen .......................................................3-3

1.6 Report Screen .........................................................................................3-4

1.7 Required Initial Registration/Settings and Confirmation .........................3-4

1.8 Entering Characters for Registration ......................................................3-5

Section 2 Basic Settings and Registration Operation .............................. 3-7

2.1 Basic Settings .........................................................................................3-7

2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen .................................3-9

2.3 Setting the Date and Time ...................................................................3-10

2.4 Setting the Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time ................................3-12

2.5 Registering the Telephone Number ......................................................3-15

2.6 Registering the Transmitter Subscriber’s Identification (TSI) ...............3-19

2.7 Registering the Self-ID ..........................................................................3-21

2.8 Registering the Administrator Number ..................................................3-22

2.9 Setting the Account Management Mode ...............................................3-24

2.10 Registering Accounts ............................................................................3-25

Page 31: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual v

2.11 Registering Passwords for Secured Communications ......................... 3-28

2.12 Registering One-Touch Keys ............................................................... 3-30

2.13 Registering an Index for One-Touch Keys ........................................... 3-39

2.14 Registering Program Keys .................................................................... 3-41

Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Section 1 General Information ....................................................................4-1

Section 2 Advanced Settings ......................................................................4-1

2.1 Changing the Initial Settings ................................................................... 4-1

2.2 Transmission Settings .......................................................................... 4-26

2.3 Setting the Reception Functions ........................................................... 4-35

2.4 Setting the Memory Lock for the Received FAX ................................... 4-37

2.5 Setting for Received Documents .......................................................... 4-43

2.6 Report Print Settings ............................................................................ 4-54

2.7 Confirming the Usage Status of Each Account .................................... 4-56

2.8 Confirming and Modifying the Page Counters ...................................... 4-57

2.9 Software Switch Settings ...................................................................... 4-60

Section 3 Advanced Registration .............................................................4-79

3.1 Establishing a Bulletin Board ................................................................ 4-79

3.2 Registering Copy Programs ................................................................. 4-84

3.3 Registering the Confidential Box .......................................................... 4-86

Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Section 1 General Introduction ...................................................................5-1

Section 2 Basic Sending Operations ..........................................................5-1

2.1 Quick Memory Transmission .................................................................. 5-1

Page 32: IT3520_2520 User Manual

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

vi Table of Contents

2.2 Calling the Destination and Transmitting the Document .........................5-5

2.3 Selecting the Communications Mode (For optional 2nd G3 Port only)....5-5

2.4 Using Full Dialing for International Destinations .....................................5-6

2.5 When Transmission is Unsuccessful ......................................................5-6

2.6 Using One-Touch Dialing ........................................................................5-7

2.7 Searching the Destination by Name .....................................................5-10

2.8 Using Program Dialing Keys .................................................................5-12

2.9 Sending Fine Print and Photos .............................................................5-14

2.10 Adjusting Contrast ................................................................................5-16

2.11 Sending Documents without Reduction ................................................5-17

2.12 Selecting the Scan Area .......................................................................5-19

2.13 Using Chain Dialing ..............................................................................5-22

Section 3 Basic Receiving Operations ..................................................... 5-24

3.1 Changing the Reception Mode .............................................................5-24

3.2 While Receiving a Document ................................................................5-25

3.3 When the Recording Paper Runs Out ..................................................5-25

3.4 Paper Sizes and Document Formats ....................................................5-26

3.5 When Receiving Long Documents .......................................................5-26

3.6 Making and Receiving Telephone Calls ...............................................5-27

Chapter 6 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Section 1 General Information .................................................................... 6-1

Section 2 Advanced Transmission Operations ......................................... 6-1

2.1 Serial Broadcast Transmission ...............................................................6-1

2.2 Printing TSI Information ..........................................................................6-5

2.3 Destination Insertion ...............................................................................6-6

Page 33: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual vii

2.4 Printing the Transmission Report ........................................................... 6-7

2.5 2 in 1 Transmission ................................................................................ 6-9

2.6 2-Sided Transmission ........................................................................... 6-10

2.7 Rotation Transmission of Letter-sized Document ................................. 6-14

2.8 Priority Transmission ............................................................................ 6-15

2.9 Timer Transmission .............................................................................. 6-16

2.10 Using the TX Marker ............................................................................. 6-17

2.11 Real-Time Transmission ....................................................................... 6-19

2.12 Password Transmission ....................................................................... 6-20

2.13 Remote Copying ................................................................................... 6-21

2.14 F-CODE ................................................................................................ 6-22

2.15 Registering a Document on a Bulletin Board ........................................ 6-25

2.16 Polling Transmission ............................................................................ 6-29

2.17 Manual Reception ................................................................................. 6-31

Section 3 Advanced Reception Operations .............................................6-32

3.1 Password Reception ............................................................................. 6-32

3.2 Selecting Password Reception ............................................................. 6-32

3.3 Receive Polling and Start Timer ........................................................... 6-32

3.4 Retrieving from a Bulletin Board ........................................................... 6-34

Chapter 7 Reports and Lists

Section 1 Reports and Lists ........................................................................7-1

1.1 Printing the Activity Report (TX) ............................................................. 7-1

1.2 Printing the Activity Report (RX) ............................................................. 7-3

1.3 Printing the One-Touch Key List ............................................................. 7-4

1.4 Printing the FAX Program List ................................................................ 7-6

Page 34: IT3520_2520 User Manual

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

viii Table of Contents

1.5 Bulletin Board List ...................................................................................7-7

1.6 Confirming the Confidential Box Information ..........................................7-9

1.7 Printing the Account List .......................................................................7-10

1.8 Printing the Setting List .........................................................................7-12

1.9 Confirming the Condition of Forwarding ...............................................7-14

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting

Section 1 Display Icons and Alarm Messages .......................................... 8-1

1.1 Display Icons ..........................................................................................8-1

1.2 Alarm Messages .....................................................................................8-2

1.3 Document Jam ........................................................................................8-7

Section 2 Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 8-22

Section 3 Power Failure ............................................................................ 8-27

3.1 Documents in Memory are Retained for 12 Hours ...............................8-27

3.2 Registered Items are Retained .............................................................8-28

Section 4 Dehumidify Function ................................................................ 8-28

Section 5 Toner Replenishment ............................................................... 8-31

Appendix A Glossary of Terms

Page 35: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual ix

List of Figures

Figure 1-1 Names and Functions of Parts .......................................................................... 1-3

Figure 1-2 Open Document Cover ...................................................................................... 1-4

Figure 1-3 Back View of the NEC IT3520 ........................................................................... 1-5

Figure 1-4 Optional Equipment for Additional Efficiency .................................................... 1-6

Figure 1-5 TX Marker Location ........................................................................................... 1-8

Figure 1-6 Operation Panel Components ........................................................................... 1-9

Figure 1-7 Angle Adjustment of Operation Panel ............................................................. 1-11

Figure 1-8 Touch Panel Display ....................................................................................... 1-12

Figure 1-9 Account Selection Screen ............................................................................... 1-13

Figure 1-10 Utility Screen ................................................................................................... 1-13

Figure 1-11 Status Display ................................................................................................. 1-14

Figure 1-12 Auto-mode Screen .......................................................................................... 1-16

Figure 1-13 Copy Screen .................................................................................................... 1-17

Figure 1-14 One-Touch Screen .......................................................................................... 1-18

Figure 1-15 Search Screen ................................................................................................. 1-19

Figure 1-16 10-key Dialing Screen ..................................................................................... 1-20

Figure 1-17 Index List Screen ............................................................................................. 1-21

Figure 1-18 Enlarge Display Screen ................................................................................... 1-23

Figure 1-19 Loading the Automatic Document Feeder ....................................................... 1-31

Figure 1-20 Using the Book Scanner .................................................................................. 1-32

Figure 1-21 Placing the Document on the Glass Surface ................................................... 1-33

Figure 1-22 Maximum and Minimum Document Sizes ....................................................... 1-35

Page 36: IT3520_2520 User Manual

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

x List of Figures

Figure 1-23 Pressing the Stop Key .....................................................................................1-36

Figure 1-24 Selecting Which Operation to Cancel ..............................................................1-37

Figure 1-25 Pressing the Panel Reset Key .........................................................................1-37

Figure 1-26 Touching Cancel on the Touch Panel .............................................................1-38

Figure 1-27 Pressing the Interrupt Key ...............................................................................1-39

Figure 1-28 Pulling Out the Paper Cassette .......................................................................1-54

Figure 1-29 Loading the Paper Cassette ............................................................................1-54

Figure 1-30 Pushing In the Paper Cassette ........................................................................1-55

Figure 1-31 Pulling Out the Paper Cassette .......................................................................1-55

Figure 1-32 Adjusting the Paper Width Guide ....................................................................1-56

Figure 1-33 Adjusting the Paper Length Guide ...................................................................1-56

Figure 1-34 Loading the Paper Cassette ............................................................................1-57

Figure 1-35 Pushing In the Paper Cassette ........................................................................1-57

Figure 1-36 Pushing the Tray Button ..................................................................................1-58

Figure 1-37 Pulling Out the Paper Cassette .......................................................................1-58

Figure 1-38 Loading the Paper Cassette ............................................................................1-59

Figure 1-39 Pushing In the Paper Cassette ........................................................................1-59

Figure 1-40 Opening the Toner Bottle Cover ......................................................................1-60

Figure 1-41 Pulling the Toner Bottle Lever .........................................................................1-60

Figure 1-42 Pulling Out the Toner Bottle Tray ....................................................................1-61

Figure 1-43 Raising the Toner Holder .................................................................................1-61

Figure 1-44 Removing the Old Toner Bottle .......................................................................1-62

Figure 1-45 Gently Shake the New Toner Bottle ................................................................1-62

Figure 1-46 Turn the Bottle to Loosen the Toner ................................................................1-62

Figure 1-47 Inserting the New Toner Bottle ........................................................................1-63

Page 37: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual xi

Figure 1-48 Inserting the New Toner Bottle ........................................................................ 1-63

Figure 1-49 Lowering the Toner Bottle Holder .................................................................... 1-64

Figure 1-50 Closing the Toner Cover ................................................................................. 1-64

Figure 1-51 Lifting the Document Feeder Cover ................................................................ 1-65

Figure 1-52 Opening the Document Guide Plate ................................................................ 1-65

Figure 1-53 Removing the Used Marker ............................................................................. 1-66

Figure 1-54 Installing a New Marker ................................................................................... 1-66

Figure 1-55 Closing the Document Guide Plate ................................................................. 1-66

Figure 1-56 Lowering the Document Feeder Cover ........................................................... 1-67

Figure 1-57 Opening the Front Unit Cover ......................................................................... 1-67

Figure 1-58 Opening the Finisher Cover ............................................................................ 1-68

Figure 1-59 Removing the Staple Holder ........................................................................... 1-68

Figure 1-60 Pushing Staple Holder Buttons ....................................................................... 1-69

Figure 1-61 Removing the Empty Cartridge ....................................................................... 1-69

Figure 1-62 Inserting the New Staple Cartridge ................................................................. 1-69

Figure 1-63 Installing the Refilled Staple Holder ................................................................ 1-70

Figure 1-64 Closing the Finisher Cover .............................................................................. 1-70

Figure 1-65 Closing the Front Cover .................................................................................. 1-70

Figure 1-66 Removing a Staple Jam .................................................................................. 1-71

Figure 1-67 Cleaning the External Surfaces ....................................................................... 1-74

Figure 1-68 Displaying the Panel Cleaning Screen ............................................................ 1-75

Figure 1-69 Panel Cleaning Mode ...................................................................................... 1-75

Figure 1-70 Cleaning the Touch Panel ............................................................................... 1-76

Figure 1-71 Reset the Touch Panel Screen ....................................................................... 1-76

Figure 1-72 Opening the Document Cover ......................................................................... 1-77

Page 38: IT3520_2520 User Manual

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

xii List of Figures

Figure 1-73 Cleaning Areas ................................................................................................1-78

Figure 1-74 Clean White Parts ............................................................................................1-79

Figure 1-75 Closing the Document Cover ...........................................................................1-80

Figure 1-76 Lifting the Document Hopper ...........................................................................1-81

Figure 1-77 Cleaning the Document Feed Rollers ..............................................................1-81

Figure 1-78 Cleaning the Lower Rollers .............................................................................1-82

Figure 1-79 Closing the Hopper and Hopper Cover ...........................................................1-82

Figure 1-80 Opening the Front Cover .................................................................................1-83

Figure 1-81 Opening the Finisher Cover .............................................................................1-83

Figure 1-82 Pulling Out the Dust Box .................................................................................1-83

Figure 1-83 Discarding the Hole Punch Dust ......................................................................1-84

Figure 1-84 Putting the Dust Box Back into Place ..............................................................1-84

Figure 1-85 Closing the Finisher Cover ..............................................................................1-85

Figure 1-86 Closing the Front Cover ...................................................................................1-85

Figure 3-1 Main Utility Screen .............................................................................................3-1

Figure 3-2 User Set Screen ................................................................................................3-2

Figure 3-3 Copy Job Program Recall Screen .....................................................................3-2

Figure 3-4 User Management Screen .................................................................................3-3

Figure 3-5 Administrator Management Screens .................................................................3-3

Figure 3-6 Report Screen ...................................................................................................3-4

Figure 6-1 TX Marker Position ..........................................................................................6-19

Figure 7-1 Activity Report (TX) Example ............................................................................7-2

Figure 7-2 Activity Report (RX) Example ............................................................................7-4

Figure 7-3 One-Touch Key List Example ............................................................................7-5

Figure 7-4 FAX Program List Example ...............................................................................7-7

Page 39: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual xiii

Figure 7-5 Bulletin Board List Example .............................................................................. 7-9

Figure 7-6 Confidential List Example ................................................................................ 7-10

Figure 7-7 Account List Example ...................................................................................... 7-12

Figure 7-8 Setting List Example ........................................................................................ 7-13

Figure 7-9 Forward List Example ...................................................................................... 7-15

Figure 8-1 Memory Clear Report Example ....................................................................... 8-28

Page 40: IT3520_2520 User Manual

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

xiv List of Figures

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 41: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT3510/IT2510 Operations Manual xv

List of Tables

Table 1-1 Standard Icons ............................................................................................................1-14

Table 2-1 Sorting / Grouping with Options ..................................................................................2-27

Table 2-2 Stapled Number of Pages Per Copied Set ..................................................................2-32

Table 2-3 Hole Punching Position ...............................................................................................2-34

Table 2-4 Examples of Copying Mixed Documents .....................................................................2-37

Table 2-5 Mixed Original Detection Mode Allowable Size Combinations ....................................2-38

Table 8-1 Display Icons .................................................................................................................8-1

Table 8-2 Alarm Messages ............................................................................................................8-2

Page 42: IT3520_2520 User Manual

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

xvi List of Tables

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 43: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 1

Chapter 1 Getting Started

SECTION 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW

The IT20Series, including the IT3520 and IT2520 products, provide full networkintegration. The series offers a full complement of features including digital copyingand document finishing accessories, facsimile, network printing, E-mail integration,network faxing, network scanning, and IP transport. This section presents theIT20Series features and functions.

Both units offer corporate workgroups and satellite offices a comprehensive solutionfor information and centralized document capabilities. Starting with the 35 page perminute (IT3520) and 25 page per minute (IT2520) print speed, and continuing withtheir 80 page duplex scanning speed, the foundation is built for your customer’s totaldocument solution.

Among the standard copier features are: 32 MB memory and 600 dpi resolution,offering outstanding copy quality for the most demanding applications. Also includedare Memory Recall, Page Insertion, Distribution Numbering, Edge Adjustment,150-page Multi-purpose Bypass Tray, and Image Repeat.

A full line of finishing features are also available. Stapling, hole punching, saddlestitching, watermarks, page insertion separation, rotation sorting, and covers allowyour NEC IT20Series unit to become a document publication center.

Duplex printing and duplex scanning round-out this impressive line-up of features,available on both units.

The NEC IT Series also offers you a full line of upgrade options: dual ports, networkprinting and network extensions allow for a life-long upgrade path for the products.

As a hub facsimile unit, the digital IT20Series offers a standard Facsimile function.Leading-edge facsimile features and functions include: Quick Memory Transmission,dual-port upgrade path, 32 MB of standard facsimile memory, double-sided originaltransmission, 540 location auto-dial, sub-addressing, and a fully integrated touchscreen.

NEC America, Inc. offers the upgrade path to fit your customer’s needs. ThePi20Series Printer Controller and Network Interface Card support the popular networkprotocols, including the 100Base-T. PCL6 is available on the Pi3520 PrinterController, and a PostScript emulation is available with the Pi3522 Printer Controller.NEC offers both, and allows the customer to select which is best for them! With the

Page 44: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 2 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

NEC IT20Series and Network Printer, your solution delivers document printing,finishing, and digital copier functionality from their desktop throughout the entirenetwork.

An Ei3520 Network Applications Kit is also available for the NEC IT20Series. Thistechnical innovation allows the NEC IT20Series to evolve into your customer’sInternet/Intranet communications network, providing several application opportunities.

The Ei3520 Network Applications include:

� Network Fax - offers clients on the network to fax from their desktop through theIT3520.

� E-mail Transmission - users no longer need to scan an image into their PC toe-mail it. Simply load the document into the NEC IT3520, dial the destinatione-mail address, and send the e-mail message directly from the unit.

� Scan to E-mail - scan directly into your e-mail box on your PC and the IT20Seriesunit can convert the scanned image to TIFF or PDF file format. The e-mailmessage arrives with the scanned image as an attached file, so it can be opened,viewed, saved, or inserted into another application.

� Scan to File - the Ei3520 also provides an IP scanner application as well asconversion of paper documents to file format. A One-Touch key can be registeredto scan directly into a predetermined file on a PC in TIFF or PDF format. Also, aregistered key, in the IT20Series, can be set up on the PC for scanning to the PC’sselected file.

� Document Forwarding - automatically forward communications to the IT20Seriesunit to a Client PC e-mail or fax unit. Forward all received documents to wherethey need to go, where another copy is needed, or where a person can share theinformation.

� Archive Distribution - automatically archive all communications to a Client PC.Now all fax receptions can automatically be forwarded to a Client PC for security,validation, and storage.

� IP Transmission - send at network speed from one NEC ITSeries unit to another.Your documents are sent at 600 dpi for original-like quality and, by using yourIntranet, provides security for your sensitive document communications.

� Internet Fax - send your documents via Internet fax to another Internet-compatiblefacsimile device to save telephone usage costs.

Finally, the Ei3520 Network Application offers an Agent features that providesadministration management of the NEC IT20Series unit via the Internet/Intranet.

A dual-port feature offers two V.34 modems supplying 33.6K bps lines with JBIGcoding. This, in effect, doubles the unit’s facsimile communications applications. Youcan offer dual communications for high-volume, time-saving, and cost-savingsolutions.

Page 45: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 3

SECTION 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS

This section names and explains the basic functions of various parts of the product.For a description of the operation panel, refer to Section 3 Operation Panel andTouch Panel on page 1-9.

Figure 1-1 Names and Functions of Parts

Duplexing Document Feeder (Automatic Document Feeder)

Document Feeder Cover

Document Guide PlateAdjustable to the width of the document

Touch PanelUser interface for entering and registering information

Exit TrayPrint paper exits the printer in this area

Power Switch CoverThe power switch is covered to prevent accidental shut off

Toner Bottle Cover

Multi-purpose Bypass Tray

Document Feed TrayHolds the document when feeding.

Document CoverTo be opened for using the book scanner

StopperThe stopper prevents long scanned pages from sliding off the unit

Document Exit TrayScanned pages are fed out here

Side CoversCan be opened to remove a paper jam

Operation Panel

Paper Level IndicationWhen the paper runs out, the indicator turns red to alert

Print LampGreen during printing, red if a print alarm is generated

Paper Feed Cabinet(option)

When cycling the power switch from on to off, wait for 10seconds before turning the switch to on again.

Page 46: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 4 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Figure 1-2 Open Document Cover

Document Pad

Document Scanning Area

Book ScannerWith the document cover opened, a document or book is placed on the glass surface in order to be transmitted or copied

Document Cover

Glass Surface

Page 47: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 5

Figure 1-3 Back View of the NEC IT3520

Power Inlet Ground Terminal

• Standard Machine

Connector for an extra telephone set

Line Connector(for fax line)

• For Optional 2nd G3 Port

Before connecting an extra telephone set, checkthat it can be used on the type of telephone lineinstalled. Some types of telephones may beunusable. For details, contact your serviceagent or dealer.

USB Connector for printer (option). Refer to the PC printer manual for details.

Socket for the LAN cable (option). It can be used with the Network Interface Card.

Second G3 Line Connector 1 (for fax line)

Second G3 Line Connector 2 (for fax line)

Page 48: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 6 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Figure 1-4 Optional Equipment for Additional Efficiency

Job SeparatorDocuments from the copier, printer, or facsimile are automatically sorted

.Care should be taken when removing the paper from the tray.It is possible to cut your hand with the paper, or to hit yourhand on the bottom of the Operation Panel when the panel isin the tilted position.

Pull the lever to remove thepaper from the Job Separator.

Page 49: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 7

Figure 1-5 Optional Equipment for Additional Efficiency (continued)

Mail Bin KitDocuments from the Printed pages from the PC printer are automatically sorted in each bin for a person or the group

Large Capacity CabinetUp to 2500 sheets of print paper capacity

Duplex UnitAllows printing on both sides of paper

Paper Feed Cabinet

Built-in FinisherPrinted pages from facsimile, printers, or copier are automatically sorted.Documents can be stapled and/or hole-punched.

Additional Bin KitPrinted pages from facsimile or printer are automatically sorted

Saddle/Folding KitPrinted pages from facsimile or printer are automatically sorted

Page 50: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 8 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Figure 1-5 TX Marker Location

TX Marker Stamp UnitMarks each sheet, confirming that it has successfully been scanned

Page 51: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 9

SECTION 3 OPERATION PANEL AND TOUCH PANEL

3.1 Operation Panel

The Operation Panel is used for entering information into the unit and formachine operation. The Touch Panel allows the operator to easily andefficiently register data into the unit.

Figure 1-6 Operation Panel Components

Key Name Function

CopyPress this key to copy. When this lamp is lit, the copy functions are available.

Fax/Mail/ScanPress this key to send a facsimile, e-mail, or scan a document. When this lamp is lit, the facsimile or scanning functions are available for use.

Preset Scan Press this key to use the IP Scanner function.

AccessPress this key to enable the account management mode.

Touch Panel

UtilityMode Check Pause

Fax/Mail/Scan

Copy

Access

Interrupt

Panel Reset

ClearStop

Start

10-key Pad

Contrast

Enlarge Display

Settings

Preset Scan

Page 52: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 10 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Interrupt Press this key to interrupt an operation in progress. The lamp will stay lit during the interrupt process.

Panel Reset Press this key to reset the touch panel settings.

Utility Press this key for registration and to make settings.

Mode Check Press this key to confirm the setting status of each function.

Pause

Press this key to insert a preset pause of three seconds when dialing a telephone number. A pause is needed, in certain cases, to enter additional numbers such as account numbers, passwords, etc. The pause key can also be used when registering One-Touch keys.

10-key PadPress these keys to enter a facsimile telephone number, number of copies desired, or other data to be registered.

C (Clear)

Pressing this key will reset the number of copies entered to "1". Pressing this key will also clear any data entered when dialing a number or registering information.

Start

Press this key to begin copying, transmission of a facsimile, or reception of a facsimile after talking (manual reception). Copy and transmission are available while the lamp is green. When the lamp is orange, copying and transmission are not available.

Stop

Press this key to stop an operation, such as transmission or copying. This is not the same as using the interrupt key, which temporarily suspends an operation.

Settings Press this key to activate Accessibility settings.

Enlarge Display Press this key to enlarge the touch panel display.

Contrast Press this key to adjust light and shade contrast of the touch panel display.

Key Name Function

Page 53: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 11

Figure 1-7 Angle Adjustment of Operation Panel

The angle of the Operation Panel can be adjusted for three levels.

Pull the lever to adjust the panelangle.

Page 54: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 12 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3.2 Touch Panel

The Touch Panel is used to specify the functions of the copier and facsimile,as well as to register information for various functions.

� Examples of touch panel screens shown in this manual may differ slightly from the actual display due to software modifications.

Figure 1-8 Touch Panel Display

Supplementary Function Keys

Message zone

Keys

Status and Alarm zone

� Keys / Function TabsKeys and tabs, such as [Density] and [Orig.�Copy], are used toselect operations. By touching different keys and tabs copy andfacsimile functions and registration menus can be selected. One typeof key changes the actual screen when touched, while another typeselects a desired function. In the latter case, the key changes fromnormal (dark letters on a white background) to inverted (white letterson a dark background) when touched.

� MessageThe message area further explains an operational procedure, such as[Ready to copy].

� Status Display zoneThis area displays icons indicating the volume of memory used andthe equipment status.

� Alarm Display zoneThis area displays icons warning the user of machine problems suchas no print paper installed, a paper jam, or a communication error, etc.

Page 55: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 13

Details of the Main Screens

� Account Selection Screen

This screen is displayed when the Account Management Mode has beenenabled and is used to the track machine usage by an account. Theoperator must select their accounts before using the machine.

When the Account Management Mode is open, this screen is displayedwhen <ID> is pressed.

� Utility Screen

This screen is used to set various options, register items such asfacsimile numbers, date and time, etc., and to print reports.

Figure 1-9 Account Selection Screen

Figure 1-10 Utility Screen

Page 56: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 14 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� Status Display

While the unit is performing an operation, its status is indicated by iconslocated at the bottom of the touch panel. Refer to Figure 1-11 StatusDisplay. Table 1-1 Standard Icons shows the icons displayed duringnormal machine operation. For a complete list of icons used, refer toSection 1.1 Display Icons in Chapter 8 Troubleshooting on page 8-1.

Figure 1-11 Status Display

Table 1-1 Standard Icons

Icons Description

Dialing Now dialing a destination

Dial Wait Waiting to redial a destination

Copying Now copying

Scanning Now scanning a facsimile page

Receiving Now receiving a facsimile

Sending Now sending a facsimile

Icon zone

Page 57: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 15

Automatic Display Time-out

If a selected screen, such as a menu screen, is left open the touch panelautomatically returns to the initial screen after a user-set time period.

Either the facsimile screen or the copier screen can be set as the defaultdisplay. For details on setting the default display, refer to Section 1.7 RequiredInitial Registration/Settings and Confirmation in Chapter 3 Registration andSetting Operations on page 3-4.

Automatic Back-light

The touch panel automatically turns off to save power and conserve screenlife. To enable the panel back-light, simply touch anywhere on the panelsurface. When printing is stopping (waiting to be printed), the power savefunction (Energy Save Mode, Sleep Mode) won’t work.

3.3 Stand-by Screen (Initial Screen)

The screen which is displayed when the equipment is ready to beginoperations for copying, facsimile activity, and registration, is called thestandby screen. The stand-by screen can be set from four types to suit theway you normally use the machine.

The four stand-by screen choices are:

� Auto-mode Screen (default screen set at factory)

� Copy Screen

� Facsimile Screen

� Scanner Screen (option)

For details on setting the stand-by screen, refer to Section 1.7 Required InitialRegistration/Settings and Confirmation in Chapter 3 Registration and SettingOperations on page 3-4.

Auto-mode Screen

This screen is used for both facsimile and copy operations without specifyingwhich function is used.

Page 58: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 16 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� When the 10-key Pad is used to enter a figure of four digits or more(three digits for the IT2520), or a figure starting with ’0’, "*", or "#" and<Start> is pressed, the equipment automatically determines it to be afacsimile number and begins transmission. When a three-digit number orless (a two-digit number for the IT2520) is entered, the equipmentdetermines this the number of copies required and begins copying.

� When <Copy> is pressed, the copy menu screen is displayed. To selectthe copy function, press the <Copy> key.

� When <Fax/Mail/Scan> is pressed, the facsimile menu screen isdisplayed. To select the facsimile function, press the <Fax/Mail/Scan>key.

� When the Auto-mode screen has been selected as the default screen,pressing the <Panel Reset> key twice, while in the copy or facsimilemenu screens, will return you to the Auto-mode screen.

Copy Screen

This screen is used to select various copying functions. If this equipment ismainly used as a copier, this screen can be set as the default stand-by screen.

Figure 1-12 Auto-mode Screen

Facsimile numbers registered for One-Touch keys 1~4 and copy program key 1 are displayed in this zone.

Page 59: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 17

� When <Fax/Mail/Scan> is pressed on the operation panel, the facsimilemenu screen is displayed. To select the various facsimile functions,press the <Fax/Mail/Scan> key.

FAX Screen

This screen is used to select the facsimile functions. If this equipment is usedmainly as a facsimile unit, it may be convenient to set this screen as thedefault stand-by screen. The facsimile number selection screen displayed firstcan be selected from the following:

� One-Touch numbers screen (factory default screen)

� 10-key Dialing screen

� Index List screen

For details on changing the default screen, refer to Section 1.7 Required InitialRegistration/Settings and Confirmation in Chapter 3 Registration and SettingOperations on page 3-4.

Figure 1-13 Copy Screen

Page 60: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 18 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

One-Touch Screen

This screen displays numbers that have been registered in advance forOne-Touch dialing.

� There are 36 One-Touch screens in total, and up to 540 numbers can beregistered (15 numbers per screen x 36 screens = 540 numbers total).

� When <Copy> on the operation panel is pressed, the copy menu isdisplayed. Press <Copy> to select the copy function.

� When [Search] is touched, the Search screen is displayed.

� When [10-key Dialing] is touched, the Dial Input screen is displayed.

� When [Quality & Reduction] is touched, the facsimile transmissionimage quality, contrast, and reduction screen is displayed.

� When [FAX Menu] is touched, the screen setting variouscommunications parameters is displayed.

Figure 1-14 One-Touch Screen

Page 61: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 19

Search Screen

This screen is used to search the destinations by name.

� By pressing <Copy> on the operation panel, the copy menu isdisplayed. Press <Copy> to select the copy function.

� When [One-Touch] is touched, the One-Touch screen is displayed.

� When [10-key Dialing] is touched, the Dial Input screen is displayed.

� When [Quality & Reduction] is touched, the facsimile transmissionimage quality, contrast, and reduction screen is displayed.

� When [FAX Menu] is touched, the screen setting variouscommunications parameters is displayed.

� When [Search] is touched, the screen for searching the destinationsname by spelling is displayed.

Figure 1-15 Search Screen

Page 62: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 20 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

10-key Dialing Screen

Use this screen to enter a facsimile number by using the 10-key dialing pad.

� When <Copy> on the operation panel is pressed, the copy menu isdisplayed. Press <Copy> to select the copy function.

� When [One-Touch] is touched, the One-Touch screen is displayed.

� When [Search] is touched, the Search screen is displayed.

� When [Quality & Reduction] is touched, the facsimile transmissionimage quality, contrast, and reduction screen is displayed.

� When [FAX Menu] is touched, the screen setting variouscommunications parameters is displayed.

Figure 1-16 10-key Dialing Screen

Page 63: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 21

Index List Screen

This screen displays an index list for classifying the One-Touch keys. TheIndex List makes for a convenient way to organize the previously registeredOne-Touch keys into handy categories or titles.

� There are 36 index keys in total, and up to 15 One-Touch keys can beregistered per index key.

� When <Copy> on the operation panel is pressed, the copy menu isdisplayed. Press <Copy> to select the copy function.

� When [Enter] is touched, the One-Touch screen is displayed.

� When [Search] is touched, the Search screen is displayed.

� When [10-key Dialing] is touched, the dial input screen is displayed.

� When [Quality & Reduction] is touched, the facsimile transmissionimage quality, contrast, and reduction screen is displayed.

� When [FAX Menu] is touched, the screen setting variouscommunications parameters is displayed.

Figure 1-17 Index List Screen

Page 64: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 22 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3.4 Accessibility Settings Feature

You may adjust the mode of the Touch Panel display, or the volume of thealarm to suit your convenience.

Accessibility Settings Feature

Enlarge Display

� Touch <Enlarge Display> to enlarge the Touch Panel display.

� Touch <Enlarge Display> again to go back to the normal display.

� You may operate the Touch Panel in the enlarged mode.

Key Name Function

Enlarge Display Press this key to enlarge the panel display.

Screen Mode Touch this key to indicate the screen mode. The Touch Panel display may reverse black/white.

Key Speed Settings

Touch this key to adjust the time of the key speed settings for [�][�][�][�] keys.

Confirming Screen

Touch this key to extend the length of time that the Touch Panel display goes back to the stand-by screen.

Notification Screen

Touch this key to extend the length of time for the notification screen, which shows up after pressing <Start> for the Fax/Copy operation.

Sound Setting Touch this key to adjust the volume of the key-touch sound or alarms. The volume can be set louder.

Page 65: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 23

Accessibility Settings Screen

� Set the user settings on the Accessibility Settings feature screen.Touch the <Settings> button to indicate settings screen.If various settings are already programmed, those settings will beactivated by touching <Settings>, and the <Settings> button will lightgreen.

� When the Accessibility Settings feature is active, [Set] is highlighted.Touch [Reset] to cancel the Accessibility Settings feature and go back tothe original screen. (<Settings> button lamp will turn off.)

Figure 1-18 Enlarge Display Screen

Touch this arrow to scroll up.

Touch this area to scroll up and right.

Touch this arrow to scroll right. When you reach the right end, it will shift to the left end of the next line.

Touch this area to scroll down and right.

Touch this arrow to scroll left. When you reach the left end, it will shift to the right end of the line above.

Touch this arrow to scroll down.

Touch this area to scroll up and left.

Touch this area to scroll down and left.

Page 66: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 24 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Screen Mode

Touch [Screen Mode] to indicate the screen mode. The Touch Panel displaymay reverse black/white.

� Touch [Inverted Screen] to invert the color of the Touch Panel display.

� Touch [Normal Screen] to go back to the normal display.

Key Speed Settings

Touch [Key Speed Settings] to display this screen.

� By setting up the key speed, it is possible to select the key and move thecursor continuously. This setting is for touching the [�][�][�][�] keys.

� Set the delay time (how many seconds you need to keep touching the[�][�][�][�] key on the screen [such as selecting the destinations orsetting the functions] before turning into the key repeat mode), andinterval time (how many seconds needed to keep touching the[�][�][�][�] key on the screen [such as selecting the destinations orsetting the functions] to move the cursor).

Page 67: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 25

� Touch [�] and [�] to set these times.

Example: When you keep touching [�] on the screen, such as TEL. NO.selecting screen. (The speed of the cursor’s movement is set.)

Keep touching the [Check] to confirm the set for Key Speed Settings.

Confirming Screen

Touch [Confirming Screen] to display this screen. The NEC IT 3520/IT2520 is configured so the Touch Panel display goes back to the stand-by screen automatically if there is no command given for a certain periodof time (default configuration: one minute).

� If you activate the Accessibility Settings feature, you may set it to extendthe duration time for the Confirmation screen to last before going back tothe stand-by screen.

Page 68: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 26 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Select from [30 sec], [60 sec], [90 sec.], or [120 sec] to extend the length oftime for the Confirmation screen to last. Touch [None] to go back to the stand-by screen without extending the duration time.

Notification Screen.

Touch the [Notification Screen] to display this screen:

� The NEC IT 3520/IT2520 is configured to indicate the Notification screenfor three seconds, to confirm the destination and document number,before fax/copy is started. If you activate the Accessibility Settingsfeature, you may extend the duration time for the Notification screen.

� Select [3 sec], [10 sec], or [60 sec] to extend the duration time for theNotification screen. Touch [No Limit] to continue the Notification Screento last until [Enter] is touched on the Notification screen.

Page 69: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 27

Sound Setting

Touch [Sound Setting] to display the screen.

� You may adjust the volume of the key-touch sound by five levels in thenormal default configuration.

� If you activate the Accessibility Settings feature, you may set thesevolumes to be louder. Select either [Default] or [Loud] to set thevolume.

3.5 Account and Account Management Mode

Different settings can be saved for each account of the machine. Accounts aredefined as individual persons using the unit, or accounts can be separatedepartments using the machine. Unauthorized machine usage is prevented bypre-registering approved accounts.

Accounts:� Those persons who are registered in the IT3520/IT2520 are called Accounts. Refer

to Section 2.10 Registering Accounts in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operationson page 3-25.

� Accounts are registered using the Administrator Management screen. Refer to Section2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration andSetting Operations on page 3-9.

� Registered accounts data can be amended by the accounts. Refer to Section 2.10Registering Accounts in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-25.

Account Management Mode:� The usage status for each account can be confirmed. Unauthorized use of the

machine can be prevented by registering a password for each account. Refer toSection 2.7 Confirming the Usage Status of Each Account in Chapter 4 AdvancedRegistration and Setting Operations on page 4-56.

Page 70: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 28 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� When Accounts are to be Restricted:

� When Accounts are Not Restricted:

Registration / Settings Before Use Operation When Used

Account Management Mode

Account Registration

Password Registration

Account Selection Operation

Password Input

When accounts are restricted by passwords

Limited Required Yes Required Required

When accounts are not restricted by passwords

Limited Required No RequiredNot

Required

Registration / Settings Before Use Operation When Used

Account Management Mode

Account Registration

Password Registration

Account Selection Operation

Password Input

When used with common settings

OpenNot

Required— Not Required

Not Required

When used with individual

settings

Open Required No RequiredNot

Required

Open Required Yes Required Required

Account Selection

1. Press <Access>.

2. Select the Account.

� When specified by Account Number:Touch [Account #] and use the 10-keyPad to enter the number.

Page 71: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 29

� After Completing Copying or Transmission:

When users are restricted, <Access> must be pressed once the task iscompleted. This prevents unauthorized usage after the currentoperation is finished.

When <Access> is pressed, all settings for copy and facsimile functionsare reset, and the display returns to either the Account selection screenor the stand-by screen.

3. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the Account Number (six digits).

� When no account number is registered, the stand-by screen is displayed instead.

4. Press <Access>. The stand-by screen is now displayed.

� Account Management Mode is now active, and the Account operating icon will be displayed.

Account Selection (Continued)

Page 72: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 30 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

SECTION 4 HOW TO USE THE COPIER AND FACSIMILE (AUTO-MODE SCREEN)The Auto-mode screen can be switched between setting the number of copiesneeded and the facsimile destination by simply entering the appropriate numbers.When this Auto-mode screen is displayed, the product can be used without selectingthe copy or facsimile screens.

Using various facsimile

functions

Press the <Fax/Mail/Scan> key

Auto-mode Screen

� Refer to Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Load the Document

Using various copy

functions

Press the <Copy> key

� Refer to Chapter 2 Copy Operations

Use the 10-key Pad to

enter numbers

IT3520: Enter a four-digit number (or more), or

figures starting from ’0’.

IT2520: Enter a three-digit number (or more), or

figures starting from ’0’.

IT3520: Enter a three-digit number (or less).

IT2520: Enter a two-digit number (or less).

Facsimile

transmissionCopying

Telephonenumber(facsimile)

Number ofsets to becopied

Press the Start key Press the Start key

Facsimile is transmitted to the

destination input with figuresCopy the number of sets input with figures

Page 73: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 31

SECTION 5 HANDLING DOCUMENTS

This section provides information on correctly handling documents for transmission orcopying. Document pages may be inserted in two different ways. For additionaldetails, refer to Section 5.3 Notes on Handling Documents on page 1-33.

Before Starting Operations:� The Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) feeds document pages one-by-one, when transmitting

and copying. Pages are away placed information side up, will scan from the top page down,and will exit the ADF in their original order.

� The Book Scanner is used when transmitting or copying documents that cannot be handled bythe ADF, such as books, catalogs, and bound materials.

5.1 Using the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

1. Place the document face up at the left side of the Document Feed Tray.

2. Position the document firmly against the left of the document hopper andadjust the Document Guide Plates to the width of the pages.

3. Insert the document pages gently until they reach their initial edge andstop inside the feeder.

Figure 1-19 Loading the Automatic Document Feeder

Place the document face up in the feeder.

Stopper

Page 74: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 32 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

5.2 Using the Book Scanner

1. Open the Document Cover and place the document face down and flushwith the glass surface.

2. Position the document in the top left-hand corner of the glass surface.

3. For transmission, the document should be placed with its longer sideagainst the back edge of the glass surface. If placed with the shorter sideagainst the back, the entire document may be reduced when transmitted.

4. When [Book] on the [Orig.�Copy] is used, adjust the center of thedocument to the mark on the Book Scanner.

5. Close the Document cover before beginning transmission or copying.

Figure 1-20 Using the Book Scanner

Bookscanner mark

Place the book, magazine, etc. in the top left-hand corner

Page 75: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 33

5.3 Notes on Handling Documents

Please observe these important points concerning handling documents.

When Documents are placed in the ADF

� Adjust the document guide plates to the width of the document pages.

� Remove all paper clips and staples from the documents.

� If a document has cut-and-paste or taped attachments, only the BookScanner should be used. Scanning these pages in the ADF may causea jam condition or affect the image quality.

� Do not use the ADF for scanning pages containing tape flags, as thismay cause a jam condition or affect image quality.

� Ensure that any correction fluid or ink has dried before inserting thepages into the ADF.

� Do not open the Document Feed Cover while the ADF is in use. This willcause the ADF scanning operation to be suspended.

� Ensure that no pages are left on the Book Scanner glass. The ADF willnot operate with a page left on the Book Scanner glass.

When Documents are placed on the Book Scanner

� Ensure that any correction fluid or ink has dried before inserting thepages on the glass surface.

Figure 1-21 Placing the Document on the Glass Surface

Longer side against the back. Shorter side against the back.

Page 76: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 34 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� When scanning a book, or thick document, do not force the documentcover to close. Excessive force may cause damage to the door.

� Ensure that no pages remain in the ADF. The Book Scanner will notoperate until these pages are removed.

� Certain document sizes may not be automatically detected. In thesecases, the size must be manually selected. For details, refer to Section2.12 Selecting the Scan Area in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and ReceivingOperations on page 5-19.

� Documents that may not be capable of automatic size detection:

� Dark documents

� Transparencies, such as over-head projector sheets and tracingpaper

� Unusually shaped or long documents

� Documents with raised (embossed) characters

� Documents smaller than Letter size (portrait or landscape)

� Documents larger than Ledger (11" by 17") size.

� When used with the Document Cover open

� If the paper being scanned is very thin, marks on the Document Covermay affect image quality. In this case, place a blank sheet of the samesize over the page to be scanned.

� If the document is not a standard size (i.e., Letter or Legal) the machinewill choose the nearest standard size paper.

� For correct page size detection to take place, the Document Cover mustbe opened to at least 15°.

Open cover to at least 15°

Page 77: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 35

� Do not place anything heavier than 6.6 lbs (3 kg) on the glass surface.

� Avoid looking at the Book Scanning area when scanning takes place, asa very bright light is used.

� Use the Book Scanner for copying or transmitting thin paper (11 lbs) orexcessively thick paper (heavier than 22 lbs).

� Close the Document Cover slowly.

Maximum and Minimum Document Sizes

� Document sizes from 5" by 3.9" to 11.6" by 39.3" can be scanned whenusing the ADF. If a document is of an irregular size, the size limits thatcan be scanned are shown in Figure 1-22 Maximum and MinimumDocument Sizes.

� Any size of up to Ledger (11" by 17") can be copied or transmitted usingthe Book Scanner.

Maximum Number of Pages in the ADF

� Up to 80 pages can be loaded in the ADF at a time. Paper weights ofbetween 14 lbs. and 22 lbs. may be used.

Figure 1-22 Maximum and Minimum Document Sizes

The machine puts an outer marginof 0.39" (10 mm) around the pageedge.

Page 78: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 36 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Transmitting Ledger sized Documents

� When a Ledger (11" by 17") document is transmitted, it is automaticallyreduced according to the paper sizes available in the receiving facsimile.To send Ledger size pages in their original size, select NonreducedTransmission. For additional details, refer to Section 2.11 SendingDocuments without Reduction in Chapter 5 Basic Sending andReceiving Operations on page 5-17.

SECTION 6 QUITTING AN OPERATION

This section describes how to quit an operation in progress.

Press the <Stop> Key

� Press the <Stop> key when setting functions or registering information.When the machine is operating, the function that is currently being usedis displayed on the touch panel, so that key may be touched to stop thatparticular function.

Original (sender’s) paper size Ledger (11"x17") Legal (8.5"x14")

Destination unit’s paper sizes

Ledger (11" by 17") Original size Original size

Legal Reduced to legal Original size

Letter Reduced to letter Reduced to letter

Figure 1-23 Pressing the Stop Key

Page 79: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 37

� If the <Stop> key is pressed while copying, operation is halted. Whenhalted, copying may be resumed by pressing the <Start> key.

� Pressing the <Panel Reset> key and all settings for copy and facsimilefunctions are cleared.

Figure 1-24 Selecting Which Operation to Cancel

Figure 1-25 Pressing the Panel Reset Key

Page 80: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 38 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� The registration or setting screen can be canceled by touching [Cancel]when [Cancel] is displayed on either screen. When [Cancel] istouched, the data which is being registered or setting is cleared.

SECTION 7 INTERRUPTING AN OPERATION

7.1 Interrupting

Copying or printing operations can be suspended to allow other documents tobe copied or transmitted.

Before Starting Operations:� Interruption is not possible during document scanning for transmission.

� When a facsimile is received while operation is interrupted, the received data is storedin memory without being printed. For more details, refer to Section 1.3 Memory Recallin Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-5.

� Sorting, grouping, stapling, and hole punching cannot be used when an operation isinterrupted.

� The Interrupt key lamp is lit while an operation is being interrupted.

Figure 1-26 Touching Cancel on the Touch Panel

Page 81: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 39

How to Interrupt an Operation

1. Press the <Interrupt> key.

� To cancel the selection press <Interrupt> once again.

2. Copy or transmit the document.

� To copy a document, press <Copy>.

� To send a facsimile, press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

� For more information, refer to Section 1 Basic Copy Operations in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-1, and Section 2 Basic Sending Operations in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-1.

3. Press <Interrupt>.

4. The machine will return to the pre-interrupted status.

� The interrupted operation can be continued.

SECTION 8 CONFIRMING THE SETTINGS

Communications and copier settings can be confirmed by using the Mode Check key.

Before Starting Operations:� The <Mode Check> button on the operation panel will be used to confirm the settings.

� Two confirmation categories exist:

Figure 1-27 Pressing the Interrupt Key

Page 82: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 40 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Facsimile

Destination confirmation screen: The specified destination can be confirmed andmodified.

Quality/Reduction confirmation screen: The settings for image quality, density,reduction, and scanning area can be confirmed and modified.

FAX Menu confirmation screen: FAX Menu settings can be confirmed and reset.

Copying

Settings confirmation screen: The copy functions that have been set can beconfirmed. The settings can also be reset or cancelled. Functions that have been setin advance can be registered into copy program keys.

Confirming Facsimile Settings

1. Press <Mode Check> on the FAX screen.

2. Confirm the settings.

Page 83: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 41

1. Touch [Destination] to confirm the number.

� When <Mode Check> is pressed, this screen is displayed initially.

� When multiple destinations are selected:Up to four numbers canbe displayed at a time.

If some numbers are notdisplayed, touch [�] [�] tocheck them.

� To add destinations:Touch [Add Dest.] toselect number.

� To delete a destination:Select the key for thenumber to be deleted,then touch [Delete].

� To confirm the communications mode, etc.:Select the key for thenumber to be confirmed,and touch [Detail].

Description of the screen:This icon indicates a number selection by a One-Touch key.

This icon indicates a number entered by the 10-key Pad.

Confirming the Quality Screen Settings

1. Touch [Quality] to confirm the settings.

� Confirm settings:The current settings are displayedabove each key.

� To modify settings:Touch the key for the function to bemodified and change the setting.

Confirming Facsimile Settings (Continued)

Page 84: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 42 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Confirming the FAX Menu Settings

1. Touch [FAX Menu] to confirm the settings.

� The TSI is required on all facsimile transmissions.It is illegal to turn off this feature!

� Confirming settings:The key for a function that has beenselected is displayed in reverse.

� To cancel settings:Touch the key for the function to becanceled. The appearance of the keyreturns to normal.

2. Touch [Enter]. The display returns to the FAX screen.

Confirming the Copy Settings

1. Press <Mode Check> on the Copy screen.

2. Confirm the settings.

� There are four types of confirmation screensWhen [Next] is touched, the screenchanges to the next one. When [Back]is touched, it returns to the previousscreen.

� To register a copy program:Touch [Job Mem Input] to register thefunctions that have been selected in acopy program.

� Refer to Section 3.2 Registering Copy Programs in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-84.

3. Touch [Exit]. The display returns to the Copy screen.

Page 85: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 43

Confirming the Results of Fax Transmission, Status of Printing Jobs, and SavedDocuments

Confirm the status of operation for the device, order of the pending printing jobs,results of fax transmission, and documents saved in the bulletin board or confidentialbox on the Touch Panel.

Before Starting the Operations

The Job List screen is divided into the following five categories:

� Job: Touch [Job] to display the functions under operations.

� Print Order: Touch [Print Order] to display the order (maximum of eight jobs) ofprinting, including documents for copy/received-fax/report printout/PC printout, etc.

� Print: Touch [Print] to display the status of the printing operation for thedocuments for copy/PC printout.

� Com.: Touch [Com.] to display the status of the send-fax and received-fax documents.

� Doc.: Touch [Doc.] to display the documents that are saved in the NECIT 3520/IT2520.

� Bulletin Board:Touch [Bulletin Board] to display the documents registered in thebulletin board. You may print/delete the documents registered inthe bulletin board.

� Confidential: Touch [Confidential] to display the documents saved in theconfidential box. You may print/delete documents saved in theconfidential box.

� Public: Touch [Public] to display the public documents saved in thedocument reception manager. You may print/transfer/deletedocuments saved.

Type of Document Maximum Number of Indicated Documents

Documents Now Sending/To Be Sent 200

Documents Sent 96

Documents Now Receiving/To Be Printed 200

Documents Received 256

Page 86: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 44 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Displaying the Job List

1. Touch [Job List].

2. Confirm the active function.

� Confirming the status:Up to four functions aredisplayed at a time. If thedesired function is not displayed,touch [�] and [�] to locate it.

3. Confirm the operational details:

1. Touch the function that you want to confirm.

2. Confirm the details of the function and touch [Enter].

4. Touch [Enter], the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Page 87: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 45

Confirming the Printing Order

1. Touch [Job List].

2. Touch [Print Order].

3. Confirm the printing order.

� Confirming the status:Touch [�] and [�] to search forthe document your are lookingfor, and to confirm the printingorder.

4. Touch [Enter], the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Page 88: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 46 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Confirming the Printing Status

1. Touch [Job List].

2. Touch [Print].

� Confirming the status:Up to four functions are displayed at atime. If the desired function is notdisplayed, touch [�] and [�] to locate it.

3. Confirm the printing status.

� Confirming the status:

1. Select the printing status you want to confirm.

2. Confirm the detail information and touch [Enter].

� When the document needs to be deleted:Touch [Delete].

4. Touch [Enter], the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Page 89: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 47

Confirming the Transmission Status

1. Touch [Job List].

2. Touch [Com.].

Page 90: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 48 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3. Confirm the transmission status.

� Confirming the status:Touch [�] and [�] to retrieve thedesired document, and confirm thetransmission status.

� When [Interim Rep.] is displayed:If [Interim Rep.] is touched while adocument is being scanned ortransmitted, an interim transmissionreport is printed.

� When [Delete] is displayed:If [Delete] is touched when there is adocument awaiting transmission, thetransmission is cancelled.

� When timer icon is displayed:If timer transmission is set, thetimer icon is displayed to theright of the reception date andtime.

� Time to hold the incomplete transmission data:The length of time to hold theincomplete transmission data can beset. Refer to Setting of Length of Timeto Hold Data after IncompleteTransmission (Mode 004) in Chapter 4Advanced Registration and SettingOperations on page 4-67.

4. Touch [Enter]. The display returns to the stand-by screen.

Confirming the Transmission Status (Continued)

Page 91: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 49

Confirming the Reception Status

1. Touch [Job List].

2. Touch [Com.].

3. Touch [RX Doc.].

4. Confirm the reception status.

� Confirming the status:Touch [�] and [�] to retrieve thedesired document, and confirm thereception status.

� When waiting for Polling Reception:If [Retry] is touched, dialing startsimmediately.

� When the document needs to be deleted:Touch [Delete].

5. Touch [Enter]. The display returns to the stand-by screen.

Page 92: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 50 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Confirming the Bulletin Board Document Status

1. Touch [Job List].

2. Select [Doc.], then touch [Bultn. Board].

3. Select the document to be confirmed.

� To confirm a document:Touch [�] and [�] to retrieve thedesired document, and confirm theregistered document.

When a number key is touched, detailsabout the document are displayed.

4. Confirm the details of the documents.

� When the document needs to be printed:Touch [Print].

� When the document needs to be deleted:Touch [Delete].

5. Touch [Enter] until the stand-by screen appears.

Page 93: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 51

Confirming the Confidential Box Documents

1. Touch [Job List].

2. Select [Doc.], then touch [Conf.].

3. Select the confidential box.

� The key of the box that stores a document displays in reverse.

� When the password is set to the confidential box, entering the password is required.

4. Confirm the documents stored in the confidential box.

� To confirm a document:Touch [Check] the detailed information.

Touch [�] and [�] to retrieve thedesired document, and confirm thedocument stored in the box.

� When the document needs to be printed:Touch [Print]. All documents inside theconfidential box will be printed.

� When the document needs to be deleted:Touch [Delete]. All documents insidethe confidential box will be deleted.

Page 94: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 52 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

5. Touch [Enter]. The stand-by screen is displayed.

Confirming the Saved Documents

1. Touch [Job List].

2. Select [Doc.], then touch [Public].

3. Confirm the saved documents.

� To confirm the documents:Touch [�] and [�] to retrieve thedesired document, and confirm thesaved documents.

� When the document needs to be printed:Touch [Print].

� When the document needs to be deleted:Touch [Delete].

� When a document needs to be transferred:Touch [Forwrd].

4. Touch [Enter]. The stand-by screen is displayed.

Confirming the Confidential Box Documents (Continued)

Page 95: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 53

SECTION 9 ROUTINE CARE

9.1 Installing Print Paper

The following section describes the procedure for installing print paper in thepaper cassette and changing the paper size.

Before Starting Operations:� Up to four paper cassettes can be installed using additional cassettes (optional items).

� The following print sizes can be set:

� If there is no paper left for printing, the message "Add paper" is displayed on the touch panelscreen. When the paper runs out, the Paper Level Indication turns red to alert user.

� Use only the recommended paper.

o = Available x = Not Available

11x17 11x14 LegalLetter

(L)Letter

(P)51/2x81/2 (L) 51/2x81/2 (P) OHP

Paper cassette o o o o o x x x

Large Capacity Cabinet x x x x o x x x

Multi-purpose Manual Bypass o o o o o o o o

(L) = Landscape direction (P) = Portrait direction OHP = Overhead Projector (transparencies)

Page 96: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 54 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Loading paper

1. Pull out the paper cassette.

2. Insert a quantity of paper into the cassette, being careful not to exceed themaximum load. This maximum is indicated by a mark on the paper guide.

Figure 1-28 Pulling Out the Paper Cassette

Figure 1-29 Loading the Paper Cassette

Maximum paper load indication

Page 97: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 55

3. Push the paper cassette back into the machine.

Changing the Paper Size

1. Pull out the paper cassette.

Figure 1-30 Pushing In the Paper Cassette

Figure 1-31 Pulling Out the Paper Cassette

Page 98: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 56 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Pinch the paper width guide with your fingers, and slide the paper guide tothe desired width.

3. Hold the paper length guide and slide the guide to the desired length.

Figure 1-32 Adjusting the Paper Width Guide

Figure 1-33 Adjusting the Paper Length Guide

Page 99: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 57

4. Insert a quantity of paper into the cassette, being careful not to exceed themaximum load. This maximum is indicated by a mark on the paper guide.

5. Push in the paper cassette and replace the paper size label to reflect thesize currently installed.

Figure 1-34 Loading the Paper Cassette

Figure 1-35 Pushing In the Paper Cassette

Maximum paper load indication

Page 100: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 58 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Installing Paper (Large Capacity Cabinet)

1. Push the <Push> button.

2. Pull out the paper cassette.

Figure 1-36 Pushing the Tray Button

Figure 1-37 Pulling Out the Paper Cassette

� When the main power is off, even if the tray button is pushed, the paper cassette cannot be pulled out.

Page 101: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 59

3. Insert a quantity of paper into the cassette, being careful not to exceedthe maximum load. This maximum is indicated by a mark on the paperguide. Paper can be installed in both sides of the cassette.

4. Push the paper cassette back into the machine.

Figure 1-38 Loading the Paper Cassette

Figure 1-39 Pushing In the Paper Cassette

Page 102: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 60 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

9.2 Installing and Replacing the Toner Bottle

1. Pull down on the toner bottle housing area cover.

2. Pull the lever.

Figure 1-40 Opening the Toner Bottle Cover

Figure 1-41 Pulling the Toner Bottle Lever

Page 103: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 61

3. Pull out the toner bottle tray.

4. Raise the holder.

Figure 1-42 Pulling Out the Toner Bottle Tray

Figure 1-43 Raising the Toner Holder

Page 104: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 62 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

5. Slowly pull out the old toner bottle.

� This step is not necessary when installing the initial toner bottle.

6. Gently tap the new toner bottle four to five times on each end (top andbottom) against a firm surface. This will loosen any settled toner.

7. Shake the new toner bottle well to loosen up the toner inside.

� Turn the bottle upside-down about five times.

Figure 1-44 Removing the Old Toner Bottle

Figure 1-45 Gently Shake the New Toner Bottle

Figure 1-46 Turn the Bottle to Loosen the Toner

Page 105: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 63

8. Make sure the UP mark is facing upwards and install the toner bottle inthe toner bottle tray. Lower the holder.

9. Peel off the seal slowly. Caution: If the seal is not peeled off slowly,the toner may spill out and cause stains.

Figure 1-47 Inserting the New Toner Bottle

Figure 1-48 Inserting the New Toner Bottle

Page 106: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 64 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

10. Replace the toner bottle tray, until a ’click’ sound is heard.

11. Closer the toner cover.

� The toner is automatically supplied to the unit after the toner bottle cover is closed. Do not turn off the power, or open this cover while the tone is being supplied.

It may be impossible to remove the toner bottle if the cover is opened while the bottle is being rotated. In this case, close the cover, and try again a short time later.

� Toner Supply: If the print is still faint immediately after toner replacement, execute the toner supplyprocedure. For details on this procedure, refer to Section 5 Toner Replenishment inChapter 8 Troubleshooting on page 8-31.

Figure 1-49 Lowering the Toner Bottle Holder

Figure 1-50 Closing the Toner Cover

Page 107: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 65

9.3 Installing and Replacing the Spare Transmission (TX) Marker Stamp

This procedure illustrates how to install and replace the TX Marker.

Before Starting Operations:� A spare TX Marker Stamp is required.

� The spare TX Marker Stamp is a consumable part. Replacement markers must bepurchased from the dealer who sold this product.

Installing and Replacing the Spare TX Marker Stamp

1. Pull the lever and lift up on the Document Feeder Cover.

2. Open the Document Guide Plate.

Figure 1-51 Lifting the Document Feeder Cover

Figure 1-52 Opening the Document Guide Plate

Page 108: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 66 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3. Pull out the used Marker.

� This step is not necessary on an initial Marker installation.

4. Insert the new Marker in place.

5. Close the Document Guide Plate.

Figure 1-53 Removing the Used Marker

Figure 1-54 Installing a New Marker

Figure 1-55 Closing the Document Guide Plate

� Fit the little round peaks fixed to the Marker to the slit in the main product.

Page 109: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 67

6. Lower the Document Feeder Cover to the operating position.

9.4 Installing and Adding Staples

This section describes how to install and add staples in the optional Built-inFinisher Unit. When the Finisher Unit is first installed, staples will need to beadded to the stapler. When the warning message "There are no staples" isdisplayed, the staple supply is exhausted and will need replacement.

Installing and Adding the Staple Cartridge

1. Open the front cover.

Figure 1-56 Lowering the Document Feeder Cover

Figure 1-57 Opening the Front Unit Cover

Page 110: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 68 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Open the Finisher cover.

3. Pull out the staple holder.

Figure 1-58 Opening the Finisher Cover

Figure 1-59 Removing the Staple Holder

Cog

Stapler

� When the stapler becomes empty, the stapler moves to the front position automatically. If the stapler is at back inside, rotate the green cog and move the stapler to the front position.

Page 111: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 69

4. Push two [PUSH] buttons on the sides of the staple holder.

5. Pull out the empty staple cartridge from the staple holder.

6. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple holder, and carefully removethe stopper sticker.

Figure 1-60 Pushing Staple Holder Buttons

Figure 1-61 Removing the Empty Cartridge

Figure 1-62 Inserting the New Staple Cartridge

Staple Cartridge

Page 112: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 70 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

7. Insert the refilled staple holder into the stapling unit.

8. Close the Finisher cover.

9. Close the front cover.

Figure 1-63 Installing the Refilled Staple Holder

Figure 1-64 Closing the Finisher Cover

Figure 1-65 Closing the Front Cover

Page 113: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 71

Clearing a Staple Jam

1. If a staple should jam, remove the staple holder. Refer to Section 9.4Installing and Adding Staples on page 1-67.

2. Push the guide up on the staple holder to remove the sheet of staples.The jammed staple can be removed.

3. Replace the staple holder.

� After a staple jam has been cleared, stapling may not occur for a maximum of 10 times, until the sheet of staples is brought into position.

Installing and Adding the Staple Cartridge (Saddle/Folding Kit)

1. While holding up the paper outputtray, remove the staple cartridge.

Figure 1-66 Removing a Staple Jam

Page 114: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 72 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Press in the area marked "PUSH" tounlock the staple holder.

3. Remove the empty staple cartridgefrom the staple cartridge holder.

4. Insert the new staple cartridge intothe staple cartridge holder.

Page 115: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 73

5. Carefully remove the stopper.

6. Insert the refilled staple cartridgeholder until it locks into place.

� Caution!:Be careful when installing the staplecartridge holder.Be sure that the staple cartridge holder

is inserted facing the correct direction.

7. Lower the paper output tray.

8. Open then shut the misfeed-clearing door.

Page 116: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 74 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

9.5 Cleaning

This section describes how to clean various areas of the machine.

Before Starting Operations:� Use a soft cloth slightly dampened with water, or a gentle cleanser. Be certain to

thoroughly wring out the cloth before using it, as dripping any liquid inside the unit cancause product failure.

� The panel-cleaning screen should be selected on the touch panel before cleaning itbegins.

� Both the glass surface of the document scanning area and the document feed rollers should be cleaned often in order to maintain high image quality. Any dirty or paper dust on these surfaces can adversely affect the copy quality. Maintaining a regular cleaning schedule will keep these areas free of contaminants.

Cleaning the External Surfaces

1. Using a damp cloth, wipe each surface area of the unit.

Figure 1-67 Cleaning the External Surfaces

Page 117: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 75

Cleaning the Touch Panel

1. The panel screen should be displayed.

Figure 1-68 Displaying the Panel Cleaning Screen

Figure 1-69 Panel Cleaning Mode

• Press <Utility>.

• Select [User Management], and touch [Panel Cleaning].

Page 118: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 76 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Clean the Touch Panel.

3. Press <Panel Reset> to return to the Utility screen.

Figure 1-70 Cleaning the Touch Panel

Figure 1-71 Reset the Touch Panel Screen

Page 119: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 77

Cleaning the Document Scanning Area

1. Open the document cover.

Figure 1-72 Opening the Document Cover

Page 120: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 78 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Clean the document scanning area, glass top, and document pad.

Figure 1-73 Cleaning Areas

Clean here

Page 121: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 79

3. Clean the top white parts.

Figure 1-74 Clean White Parts

Top White Parts

Page 122: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 80 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

4. Close the document cover.

Figure 1-75 Closing the Document Cover

Page 123: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 81

Cleaning the Document Feed Rollers

1. Pull the lever and lift the Document Feeder Cover.

2. Clean the ten feed rollers in the hopper area. Refer to Figure 1-77Cleaning the Document Feed Rollers.

Figure 1-76 Lifting the Document Hopper

Figure 1-77 Cleaning the Document Feed Rollers

Clean rollersClean rollers

Page 124: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 82 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3. Lift the document guide plate up as well, and clean the four lower rollers.

4. Close the document guide plate and lower the document feeder cover totheir original position.

Figure 1-78 Cleaning the Lower Rollers

Figure 1-79 Closing the Hopper and Hopper Cover

Clean rollers

Page 125: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 83

Throwing Away the Hole Punching Dust

1. Open the front cover.

2. Open the Finisher cover.

3. Pull out the dust box (FN3.1).

Figure 1-80 Opening the Front Cover

Figure 1-81 Opening the Finisher Cover

Figure 1-82 Pulling Out the Dust Box

Dust Box

Page 126: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 84 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

4. Throw away the hole punching dust.

5. Insert the dust box (FN3.1).

Figure 1-83 Discarding the Hole Punch Dust

Figure 1-84 Putting the Dust Box Back into Place

Page 127: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 1 - 85

6. Close the Finisher cover.

7. Close the front cover.

Figure 1-85 Closing the Finisher Cover

Figure 1-86 Closing the Front Cover

Page 128: IT3520_2520 User Manual

1 - 86 Getting Started

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 129: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 1

Chapter 2 Copy Operations

SECTION 1 BASIC COPY OPERATIONS

There are two ways to scan documents when making copies:

� Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) - up to 80 pages will automatically bescanned, page-by-page.

� Book Scanner - When a book, magazine, catalog, brochure, or any other boundmaterial is to be copied, the Book Scanner should be used.

Before Starting Operations:� Observe which screen is being displayed to determine how to begin the Copy mode.

� Auto-mode screen:Copying is available whenever this screen is displayed.

If four digits or more are input (three digits for the IT2520), or a number beginning with’0’, ’*’, ’#’ (facsimile number), the Auto-mode screen automatically switches to thefacsimile transmission mode.

� Copy screen:The machine is ready to copy when the Copy screen is showing.

This chapter describes using the NEC IT3520/IT2520 basic copy functions, as well as moreadvanced functions. Features such asenlargement or reduction, image quality selection,selecting the copy paper size, sorting, stapling,and hole-punching will be covered in detail.

Page 130: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 2 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� FAX screen:When the FAX screen is displayed, press the <Copy> key to make copies.

� Memory Recall Function:The machine first scans the document and stores the data in memory beforestarting to copy. This image data is retained in memory and can be used to makerepeated copies. This is called "Memory Recall".

� For further details on this function, refer to Section 1.3 Memory Recall in Chapter 2 on page 2-5.

1.1 Copying with the Automatic Document Feeder

The Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) allows up to 80 pages at a time to beplaced into the feeder. Each page is scanned, one-by-one, and exits thefeeder in the original order, as it was inserted.

Copying with the Automatic Document Feeder

1. Load the document in the Automatic Document Feeder.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Use the 10-key pad to enter the number of copies.

� Change the number of copies by pressing <C> (Clear key).

� Up to 999 copies (99 copies for the IT2520) can be made.

4. Press <Start>.

Page 131: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 3

1.2 Copying with the Book Scanner

The Book Scanner allows copies to be made of books, magazines, reports, orany other bound material.

5. Confirm Accepted time, Job No., and touch [Enter].

6. Copying will now begin.

� Copying begins even if [Enter] is not touched.

� To Stop Copying: Press <Stop> to cease copying. The screen changes to the stop screen and the copy process will stop. Refer to Section 6 Quitting an Operation in Chapter 1 on page 1-36.

� If Memory is Full:Retry copying later if the facsimile function is being used.

� If paper is empty, refill the cassettes as needed. Refer to Section 9.1 Installing Print Paper in Chapter 1 on page 1-53.

Copying with the Automatic Document Feeder (Continued)

Page 132: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 4 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Copying with the Book Scanner

1. Open the Document Cover and place the document on the glass surface.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Close the Document Cover.

3. Press <Copy>.

4. Use the 10-key pad to enter the number of copies.

� Change the number of copies by pressing <C> (Clear key).

� Up to 999 copies (99 copies for the IT2520) can be made.

5. Press <Start>.

6. Confirm the Accepted time, Job No., and touch [Enter].

Page 133: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 5

1.3 Memory Recall

The Memory Recall function allows for repeat copying of a document.

7. Copying will now begin.

� Copying begins even if [Enter] is not touched.

� To Stop Copying:Press <Stop> to cease copying. The screen changes to the stop screen and the copy process will stop. Refer to Section 6 Quitting an Operation in Chapter 1 on page 1-36.

� If Memory is Full:Retry copying later if the facsimile function is being used.

� If paper is empty, refill the cassettes as needed. Refer to 9.1 Installing Print Paper in Chapter 1 on page 1-53.

Memory Recall (Repeat Copying of the Same Document)

1. Touch [Job List], when the Memory Recall icon is displayed.

� Memory Recall icon is displayed only when the function is available.

� Memory Recall is not available in the following cases:

• When the power is turned off

• When a new document isscanned. (When <Start> ispressed). The new document willbe able to perform MemoryRecall.

Copying with the Book Scanner (Continued)

Page 134: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 6 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Touch [Memory Recall Waiting].

� To clear: Select [Back] and touch [Clear].

� It is recommended that <Panel Reset> be pressed after copying to delete confidential document data.

3. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

� The number of copies and the Sorting mode can be changed.

Memory Recall (Repeat Copying of the Same Document)

Page 135: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 7

1.4 Selecting the Copy Paper Size for Copying

When two or more sizes of paper are installed, the print paper size selectioncan be set automatically in accordance with the scanned document. Manualpaper size selection is available, as well.

Before Starting Operations:� The machine automatically reduces or enlarges the copied image in accordance with

the print paper size if [Auto Size] is selected as the zoom ratio. For details onenlargement and reduction, refer to Section 1.6 Selecting the Zoom Ratio forCopying in Chapter 2 on page 2-14.

Automatic Paper Selection Function:

� This function automatically selects the paper in accordance with the scanneddocument’s size, direction, and zoom ratio setting.

� The Automatic Paper Selection function has a preset (default) factory setting. It canbe set to select a determined copy paper cassette as priority. For details, refer toSection 1.4 Selecting the Copy Paper Size for Copying.

� If an irregularly sized document is set (any size other than letter or legal size), thedocument size may not be detected correctly, and may be copied on the incorrect sizepaper or not copied at all. In this case, the operator must manually select the copypaper cassette.

� When the ADF is used for copying, the copy size will be determined by the firstscanned page of the document and the same sized paper will be used for theremaining printed pages. (This does not apply to a case when the ’Mixed OriginalDetection’ setting has been enabled.)

� When letter sized paper is selected for copying, even if the document and paperdirection differ, the direction of the paper can automatically be rotated 90o for copying.(This function cannot be used when the Book Scanner is used for copying afterselecting the paper.)

Selecting the Copy Paper Cassette

1. Load the document in the ADF or Book Scanner.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

Page 136: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 8 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3. Select [Basics] and touch [Paper].

4. Select the Paper Cassette.

� To Select the paper:The copy paper size, direction, and cassette number are displayed on the keys that depict the paper cassette. Select the paper cassette in accordance with the original document’s direction.

� When the [Auto Paper] key is touched:Paper will automatically be selected in accordance with the original document’s size and zoom ratio.

5. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Copying with the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray

1. Load the document in the ADF or Book Scanner.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Selecting the Copy Paper Cassette (Continued)

Page 137: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 9

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Select [Basics] and touch [Paper].

4. Select the Multi-purpose Bypass Tray and touch [Mode Change].

Copying with the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray (Continued)

Page 138: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 10 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

5. Select the paper size and type.

Paper Sizes and Types:

• Regular Size (Letter or Legal)

1. Touch the cassette paper size.

� Print paper selection should be made in accordance with the original document’s size and direction.

• Irregular Sized Paper

1. Touch [Custom Size].

2. Touch the � and � to enter the horizontal length (X) and to enter the vertical length (Y).

3. Touch [Enter].

� To Select:Touch [X] and [Y] to move the cursor.Sizes available:X = 5 1/2 inches to 17 inches (140 to 432 mm)Y = 3 9/16 inches to 11 11/16 inches (90 to 297 mm)

Copying with the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray (Continued)

Page 139: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 11

• Memorizing the Paper Size

1. Touch [Custom Size].

2. Touch [Memorize Paper Size].

3. Touch the � and � to enter the horizontal length [X] and to enter the vertical length [Y].

4. Select [1] or [2] and then touch [Enter].

• Using the Memorized PaperSize for Copying

1. Touch [Custom Size].

2. Select [1] or [2] and then touch [Enter].

• Copying on OHP paper or Card

1. Select the paper type, and touch [Enter].

� The Card setting should be selected when printing postcards or labels.

6. Touch [Enter].

Copying with the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray (Continued)

Page 140: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 12 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

7. Load a sheet of paper onto the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

1. Open the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.• If a large sheet of print paper is being

used, open the extension table toprevent it from falling out.

2. Place a sheet of paper on the tray.

3. Adjust the guides to the paper width.

4. Insert the paper until the paper stops.

� Observe the following:• Adjust the guides exactly to the

paper width.

• Set a new paper each time you copy.

• Set the document pages face down.

• Set the original document inaccordance with the size anddirection of the selected paper.

• Do not use wrinkled, folded, or damppaper.

• Avoid using paper that has beenprinted on one side. This can lead topaper jamming.

• When a postcard or thick paper stockis used, straighten out the shapebefore inserting onto the tray.

• When thick paper, OHP paper,postcards, or labels are used forcopying, do not select any of the2-Sided Copying, Booklet, Stapling,or Holepunching functions.

• Up to 150 sheets can be set. Whenpostcards, labels, OHP papers, orthick papers are used, don’t set over50.

• When envelopes are used don’t setover 10.

• When postcards or envelopes areused, set the shorter side of thepaper toward the Multi-purposeManual Bypass Tray.

• When envelopes are used, load withthe flap side up, as shown in thedrawing.

Copying with the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray (Continued)

Extension Table

Page 141: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 13

• When envelopes are used, push outany air inside the envelope and holdthe edge tightly. If the edge is notheld tightly, it can lead to wrinkling orpaper jamming.

8. Copying will now begin.

� To copy two or more sheets:Consecutive copying is possible by setting the appropriate amount of paper on the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

Copying with the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray (Continued)

Special Paper Mode

When the icons above are displayedon the paper size selection key, thespecial paper mode is set for thatcassette.

The icons displayed and theirdescription are shown next.

Recycled paperIf this mode has been set, the papercassette containing recycled print paper isnot selected when the automatic paperselection function is enabled. For example, ifboth new and recycled paper are loaded intoseparate cassettes and the new paper ismainly used, the new paper is selected asthe priority paper when copying by setting thecassette containing recycled paper into this’Recycled paper’ mode.

2-Sided Copy is ImpossibleThis icon indicates that double sided copyingis impossible for the print paper in thiscassette.

The product will not select that particularcassette in the Auto Paper mode.

Page 142: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 14 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

1.5 Paper Size Reset

The paper size selection is reset to the default setting by touching<Panel Reset>. If the machine sits idle, the paper size selection will also bereset after a period of time (set by the user).

1.6 Selecting the Zoom Ratio for Copying

Before Starting Operations:

� When Special Paper Mode is set:Installing the same sized paper in two cassettes, or more, allows the unit to automatically switch between paper cassettes to continue the print job, if paper runs out in a cassette. However, if this mode is set, the cassette will not be selected.

� The zoom ratio can be selected by the following methods:

• Full-Size The document is copied in the same size as the original, regardless of the copy paper size.

Copying with the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray (Continued)

Special paperWhen this mode is set, the paper is notselected automatically. For example, this willprevent accidently printing on special coloredpaper, which had been intended only for use ascover sheets or separators in the printed copy.

The NEC IT3520/IT2520 can reduce orenlarge the size of copies. The zoomratio can be set automatically inaccordance with the originaldocument’s size and the sizes of copypaper installed, or it can be setmanually.

Page 143: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 15

1.7 Selecting the Zoom Ratio

The zoom ratio can be selected by the operator. Automatic zoom adjustmentis available, as well as manually setting the zoom for precise reduction orenlargement.

• Auto-Size The optimal zoom ratio is automatically selected in accordance with the size of the original and the selected copy paper size.

• Fixed Zoom (Letter, Legal, etc.) Zoom ratio for copying regular-sized documents onto regular-sized copy paper have already been set in touch panel keys.

• Zoom Up/Zoom Down The desired zoom ratio can be set in increments of 0.1%.

• Slightly Smaller Image The document can be copied at a slightly smaller size than the original by simply touching the [Minimal] key. This is useful when copying documents with writing at the very edge of the paper. The zoom ratio can also be changed.

• Custom Zoom The desired zoom ratio can be set using the 10-key Pad.

• X/Y Zoom The X and Y zoom ratio can be set for the document’s length and width.

• Zoom Memory Input Up to two, most frequently used zoom ratios can be registered.

Selecting the Zoom Ratio

1. Load the document in the ADF or the Book Scanner.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

� The zoom ratio can be selected by the following methods: (Continued)

Page 144: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 16 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Select [Basics] and touch [Zoom].

4. The various zoom settings are then displayed. Select the zoom ratio.

Selecting the Zoom Ratio (Continued)

Page 145: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 17

1.8 Zoom Selections Available

Setting to Full-Size:

1. Touch [Full-Size].

Setting the Fixed Zoom Ratio:

1. Select either an enlargement or a reduction key for the desired zoom ratio.

2. Make the selection in accordance with the original’s size and the installed copy paper sizes.

Setting the Automatic Zoom Ratio:

1. Touch [Auto Size].

� Irregular sized documents (any size other than Letter or Legal) may be copied with an incorrect zoom ratio. In such cases, a manual zoom setting should be made.

� When [Auto Size] is touched, the screen changes to the paper cassette selecting screen.

Using the Zoom Up/Zoom Down Key:

1. Use the � or � arrow key to select the zoom ratio.

� To Select:Every time the � arrow is touched, the zoom ratio increases by 0.001 (0.1%).Every time the � arrow is touched, the zoom ratio decreases by 0.001 (0.1%).The zoom ratio can be changed rapidly by repeatedly touching the arrow key.

Page 146: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 18 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Slightly Smaller Image Copies:

1. Touch [Minimal].

� The zoom ratio for documents needing only slight reduction can be changed. For details, refer to Section 1.6 Selecting the Zoom Ratio for Copying on page 2-14.

� The factory default setting is 93%.

Setting the X/Y Zoom:

1. Touch [Custom Zoom].

2. Touch [X/Y Zoom].

3. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the zoom ratio for paper width (X) and length (Y) and touch [Enter].

Custom Zoom Ratio:

1. Touch [Custom Zoom].

2. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the zoom ratio and touch [Enter].

� To Select:Figures ranging from 0.250 (25%)to 4.000 (400%) can be selectedas the zoom ratio. For example,for 0.645 (64.5%), press <0>,<6>, <4>, and <5> in that orderusing the 10-key Pad. Press <C>(Clear key) to clear the figures.

� To Select:Enter figures after touching [X]or [Y]. Figures ranging from0.250 (25%) to 4.000 (400%)can be selected as the zoomratio.

Page 147: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 19

1.9 Registering the Zoom Ratio

The zoom ratio may be registered into a key, so that the most frequently usedsettings are conveniently available to the operator at the touch of a single key.

Registering the Zoom Ratio

1. Touch [Custom Zoom].

2. Touch [Memorize Zoom].

3. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the zoom ratio before selecting [1], [2], or [Minimal]. Then touch [Enter].

� To Select:When touching [1], [2], or [Minimal] afterentering the zoom ratio, the zoom ratiois registered on the selected key.

Figures ranging from 0.250 (25%) to4.000 (400%) can be selected as thezoom ratio for [1] or [2], and figuresranging from 0.900 (90%) to 0.999(99.9%) for [Minimal].

For example, for 0.645 (64.5%), press<0>, <6>, <4>, and <5> using the10-key Pad. Press <C> (Clear) todelete the characters.

Page 148: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 20 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

1.10 Using the Registered Zoom Ratio for Copying

A pre-registered zoom ratio can be executed at the touch of a key. This isuseful when regular zoom amounts are used in copying jobs.

1.11 Zoom Ratio Reset

The zoom ratio selection is reset to the default setting by touching<Panel Reset>. If the machine sits idle, the zoom ratio selection will also bereset after a period of time set by the user.

1.12 Adjusting the Density for Copying

The density can be adjusted to suit the contrast of the text and the backgroundof the document being copied. For example, if the document is printed ondark colored paper, the density can be adjusted to print the text clearly.

Before Starting Operations:� Density can be adjusted by the following methods:

• Automatic density - Determines the density of the document and automaticallyselects the optimal density for copying.

• Manual density - Allows the user to manually select the density according totheir needs.

Using the Registered Zoom Ratio for Copying

1. Touch [Custom Zoom].

2. Select [1], [2], and touch [Enter].

� To Select:The zoom ratio that has been registered on [1] or [2] is set.

3. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Page 149: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 21

Adjusting the Density

1. Load the document in the unit.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Touch [Density].

4. Touch [Auto], [Lighter], or [Darker] to select the density.

� Using the Automatic Density Function: Touch [Auto] to display it in reverse.

� Selecting with the Manual Density Function: Every time [Lighter] is touched, theprinting is lightened, whereas touching[Darker] darkens the printing.

� When [Photo] is selected for the image quality, the automatic density function cannot be used. Touch [Lighter] or [Darker] to adjust the density.

Page 150: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 22 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

1.13 Making the Choice for Density Selection

The choice for the density selection is based on the original document. Hereis an example.

1.14 Density Setting Reset

The density setting selection is reset to the default setting by touching<Panel Reset>. If the machine sits idle, the density setting selection will alsobe reset after a period of time set by the user. For more details, refer to 2.1Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 on page 4-1.

5. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Density Selection Document Type

Adjusting the Density (Continued)

Normal

Lighter

Darker

Darker document (such as newspaper orblueprint with dense characters)

Normal document

Text is light or printed in color.

Page 151: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 23

1.15 Copying Figures and Photos

Select the image quality in accordance with the original document type:

• [Text] - Select this when copying documents consisting of mainly text.

• [Photo] - Select this when copying documents containing photos, orlighter and darker parts.

• [Text/Photo] - Select this when copying documents with a mixture oftext and photos.

Setting the Image Quality

1. Load the document in the unit.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

Documents to be copied may include text, drawings, and/or photographs. The NEC IT3520/IT2520 allows you to select an appropriate Image Quality for exceptional copying.

Page 152: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 24 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

1.16 Image Quality Setting Reset

The image quality setting selection is reset to the default setting by touching<Panel Reset>. If the machine sits idle, the image quality setting selectionwill also be reset after a period of time set by the user. For more details, referto 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 on page 4-1.

3. Touch [Density].

4. Select the desired image quality from [Text], [Photo], and [Text/Photo].

� When [Photo] is selected, the automatic density function cannot be used.

5. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Setting the Image Quality (Continued)

Page 153: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 25

SECTION 2 ADVANCED COPY OPERATIONS

The more advanced copy functions will now be described. Features such as stapling,hole-punching, sorting, inserting cover sheets and OHP sheets, will be covered indetail.

2.1 Using the Sort Mode While Copying

This function is useful when making two or more sets of copies. Each set canbe printed out in the order of the original document (Sorting), or the samepage can be printed out the required number of times (Grouping). Whenmany pages of documents need to be copied for multiple sets, such asdocuments for meetings, they can easily be sorted using this function.

Before Starting Operations:� To make copies using the sort mode, the same size and same type of copy paper

should be inserted in separate paper cassettes in different directions, or the optionalBuilt-in Finisher will be required.

� If a document positioned on the original glass is copied using the "Sort" setting,copying is automatically performed using the "Separate Scan" function.

� This function cannot be used when Stapling, Hole Punch setting, Cover Mode, ImageRepeat, or Mixed Original Detection is selected.

� A paper drawer cannot be selected.

Sorting Options

• Sort The documents are copied and sorted in the same page order as the original.

• Group Each page of the document is copied separately the specified number of times.

• Non-Sort The specified number of pages are copied in the same order as the original, without being sorted.

Page 154: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 26 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Sorting Procedure

1. Load the document in the unit.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Touch [Finishing].

4. Select the desired sorting option.

� When 1-Sided to 1-Sided copying is done using the Book Scanner, the sorting functions (Group, Sort) cannot be used.

5. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the required number of copies.

6. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Page 155: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 27

Sorting / Grouping Details

When [Sort] or [Group] is selected, copying depends on the optional partsinstalled on the NEC IT3520/IT2520. Refer to Table 2-1 Sorting / Groupingwith Options.

Sorting Selection Setting Reset

The sorting selection (Sort, Non-Sort, or Group) is reset to the default settingby touching <Panel Reset>. If the machine sits idle, the sorting selection willalso be reset after a period of time set by the user. For more details refer toChapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-1.

Table 2-1 Sorting / Grouping with Options

Selecting Sort or Group

When the Job Separator or Finisher Tray is installed

When the same sized paper is loaded in separate cassettes in different directions

Sort Each set of copies is sorted by shifting the output.

Each set of copies is sorted in a different direction.

Group Copies are sorted by shifting in accordance with each page of the document.

Copies are sorted in a different direction in accordance with each page of the document.

Page 156: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 28 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.2 Stapled Binding

The sorted copies can be stapled.

Before Starting Operations:� The optional Built-in Finisher is required to use this function.

� The stapling position can be changed in accordance with the document and thedirection of the copy paper. If [OFF] is selected, the stapling position will automaticallybe specified.

� Up to 50 sheets can be stapled together when using the Built-in Finisher.

� Up to 15 sheets can be stapled together when using the Saddle/Folding Kit.

� Do not use this function with thick paper, envelope, or OHP film.

� The staple cartridge must be replaced when the "Replace the Staple Cartridge"message is displayed.

� For more details, refer to Section 9.4 Installing and Adding Staples in Chapter 1 onpage 1-67.

� If "Corner Stapling" was selected, the stapling position cannot be specified. However,if the "Corner Stapling" is used together with the "Hole Punch" setting, the staplingposition can be specified.

� If a document positioned on the original glass is copied using a stapling setting,copying is automatically performed using the "Separate Scan" function.

� A stapling setting cannot be selected if another job has been interrupted.

Stapling

1. Load the document in the unit.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Select [Basics] and touch [Finishing].

Page 157: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 29

Staple Settings

1. To staple a document:

1. Corner Staple - Touch [Cor-ner Staple].

2. 2-Point Staple - Touch [2-Point Staple], then touch [Select Position].

2. Select a stapling position, then touch [Enter].

� To select:Touch the key displaying the desiredposition.

Page 158: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 30 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Original Document’s Direction

Care must be taken when placing the original document into the ADF, or BookScanner, so that the correct stapling position occurs.

When the Corner Staple Setting is Selected:

Document Orientation

Staple PositionFeeding from the Duplexing Document Feeder

Scanning from the Original Glass

Document size: Letter C Document size: Letter C Paper size: Letter C

Document size: 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C Document size: 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C Paper size: 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C

Document size: Letter or Legal L Document size: Letter or Legal L Paper size: Letter or Legal L

Document size: 11 x 17 L Document size: 11 x 17 L Paper size: 11 x 17 L

Page 159: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 31

When 2-Point Staple Setting is Selected:

Screen Icon

Document Orientation

Staple PositionFeeding from the Duplexing Document Feeder

Scanning from the Original Glass

Document size: Letter C or 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C Document size: Letter C or 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C Paper size: Letter C or 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C

Document size: Letter C or Legal C Document size: Letter C or Legal C Paper size: Letter L or Legal L

Document size: Letter L or 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C Document size: Letter L or 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C Paper size: Letter C or 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C

Document size: Letter L or Legal L Document size: Letter L or Legal L Paper size: Letter L or Legal L

Document size: 11 x 17 L Document size: 11 x 17 L Paper size: 11 x 17 L

Page 160: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 32 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Points to Note When Stapling

It is recommended to sort up to the following number of sets of copies,otherwise the copies may become unsorted or fall from the Finisher bin slots.Refer to Table 2-2 Stapled Number of Pages Per Copied Set.

� When Saddle/Folding Kit is used, it can staple from 2 to 15 sheets.

2.3 Hole Punching

The printed copies can be 2-hole or 3-hole punched for convenience andfiling.

Before Starting Operations:� The optional Built-in Finisher and Punch Kit are required to use this function.

� The hole punching position can be changed in accordance with the original documentand the direction of the copy paper.

� Do not use this function with thick paper, envelopes, or OHP film.

� If copying is started without the hole punch position specified, or if [OFF] wasselected, the hole punch position is automatically specified according to the documentorientation, as shown:

Table 2-2 Stapled Number of Pages Per Copied Set

# Sheets to be Stapled Number of Sets Accumulated

2 100 sets

3 to 5 80 sets

6 to 10 60 sets

11 to 20 40 sets

21 to 30 33 sets

31 to 40 25 sets

41 to 50 20 sets

Page 161: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 33

Hole Punching

1. Place the document in the unit.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Select [Basics] and touch [Finishing].

4. Touch [2-Hole Punch] or [3-Hole Punch].

5. Touch [Select Position].

Page 162: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 34 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Original Document’s Direction

Care must be taken when placing the original document into the ADF, or BookScanner, so that the correct hole punching position occurs. Refer to Table 2-3Hole Punching Position.

6. Select the position for punching the holes and touch [Enter].

� To Select:Touch the display key for the holeposition to be selected.

7. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Table 2-3 Hole Punching Position

Screen Icon

Document Orientation

Feeding from the Duplexing Document Feeder

Scanning from the Original Glass

Hole Punching (Continued)

Page 163: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 35

2.4 Setting a Crease

The pages can be folded in half for creating a Booklet.

Before Starting Operations:� In order to crease the sheet of paper, the optional Built-in Finisher and Saddle/Folding

Kit is required.

� Booklet Creation must be selected before choosing [Crease]. Refer to Setting forBooklet Creation on page 2-52.

� Additionally, you can add two staples in the middle of the paper (center stapling).

� Creased and 2-Point Stapling can be applied to Letter to 11x17L sized paper.

� 2 to 15 sheets of paper can be stapled.

� Only plain and recycled paper can be creased or 2-Point Stapled.

� When crease or center stapling is selected, depending on the document set direction,it will be copied as shown below.

Table 2-3 Hole Punching Position (Continued)

Screen Icon

Document Orientation

Feeding from the Duplexing Document Feeder

Scanning from the Original Glass

Page 164: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 36 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� Depending on the document set direction, such as setting the vertical side of thelengthwise document against the back, the copy page order may be changed.

Setting a Crease

1. Place the document in the Unit.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>

3. Select [Basics] and touch [Finishing].

4. Touch [Crease].

� When using Center Staple, (folding), select the [2-Point Staple] key.

5. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Page 165: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 37

2.5 Mixed Size Original Document Detection

Copy paper is selected automatically in accordance with the length of eachoriginal document sheet fed in the ADF.

Before Starting Operations:� Original documents must be set in the ADF to use this function. Up to 80 sheets in a

document can be set at once.

� The copy speed is slightly slower since the size of each sheet is detected prior tocopying.

� If documents of different lengths are inserted without enabling this function, the copypaper is selected on the basis of the first page of the document, and the same sizedpaper as the first page will be used for the remainder (when used together with theautomatic paper selection function).

� Stapling may not be possible when the automatic paper selection function is usedtogether with this function.

Handling Documents� Make sure the document sheets are fully inserted into the ADF.

� Adjust the document guides to the largest document’s width.

Table 2-4 Examples of Copying Mixed Documents

With automatic paper selection

Original document Copy

When the automatic size is used to select Letter sized paper.

Original document Copy

Page 166: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 38 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Table 2-5 Mixed Original Detection Mode Allowable Size Combinations

Mixed Original Size

Maximum Original Width

11" 8-1/2" 5-1/2"

11 x 17L 8-1/2 x 11C 8-1/2 x 14L 8-1/2 x 11L 8-1/2 x 5-1/2C 8-1/2 x 5-1/2L

11"11 x 17L O O - - - -

8-1/2 x 11C O O - - - -

8-1/2"8-1/2 x 14L O O O O O -

8-1/2 x 11L O O O O O -

5-1/2"8-1/2 x 5-1/2C X X O O O -

8-1/2 x 5-1/2L X X X X X O

O = Copying possibleX = Combination not allowed- = Cannot be set

Selecting Mixed Original Detection

1. Place the document in the Automatic Document Feeder.

� Stack the document pages face up, making sure that all pages are aligned at the top edge and on the left side.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

Page 167: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 39

Mixed Original Detection Setting Reset

The mixed document selection is reset by pressing <Panel Reset> or will bereset after the machine sits idle for a time set by the user. For more details,refer to 1.7 Required Initial Registration/Settings and Confirmation in Chapter3 on page 3-4.

2.6 Selecting the Document and Copy Format (Orig.�Copy Screen)

Various ways of copying can be selected by combining the document andcopy formats. This function enables 2-Sided copying, Separation copying fordocuments on two facing pages, and copying multiple documents on onepage; all features are displayed on one convenient screen.

3. Select [Basics] and touch [Mixed Orig Detection].

� [Mixed Orig Detection] is displayed in reverse when it is selected.

� [Mixed Orig Detection] can be selected only when [1 Sided] is selected in both the document and copy menus on the [Orig.� Copy] screen, and the 2-Sided Print Unit is used.

4. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Selecting Mixed Original Detection (Continued)

Page 168: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 40 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Orig.�Copy Screen:

Use the [Orig.�Copy] function to select the document and copy formats.

Document Format: (the document to be scanned)

1-Sided documents - To be used when a 1-Sided document is copied.

2-Sided documents - To be used when a 2-Sided document is copied.

Bound documents - To be used when copying bound pages, such asin a book or magazine, etc. The document shouldbe set on the Book Scanner when copying boundmaterial. Select [Standard Book] or[Right Bound] in accordance with the side of thebound material.

Copy Format:

1-Sided copying - Copying onto a single side of paper.

1-Sided documents

2-Sided documents

Bound documents(books, magazines)Separation copyingSpread sheet copyingBook erasing

1-Sided copying

2-Sided, 2in1 copying1-Sided, 4in1 copying2-Sided, 4in1 copyingBooklet Creation

1-Sided, 2in1 copying 4in1 Booklet

2-Sided copying

Page 169: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 41

2-Sided copying - Copying onto both sides of the paper.The optional 2-Sided Print Unit is required.

1-Sided, 2in1 copying - Two sheets of a document are copied onto asingle side of copy paper.

2-Sided, 2in1 copying - A total of four pages of a document arecopied onto both sides of a single sheet ofcopy paper. The optional Duplex Unit is required.

1-Sided, 4in1 copying - A total of four pages of a document arecopied onto a single side of paper. This function may not be available,depending on the model.

Page 170: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 42 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2-Sided, 4in1 copying - A total of eight pages of a document arecopied onto both sides of a single sheet ofcopy paper.The optional Duplex Unit is required.This function may not be available,depending on the model.

Booklet Creation - Copying onto both sides of copy paper in book pageorder. Folding and binding the paper down thecenter can make a booklet, magazine, reports, etc.The optional Duplex Unit is required.

Page 171: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 43

Book/Separation copy - This function can be used to copy a bounddocument.The bound document is copied onto individualpages.

Book/Spreadsheet copy - This format can be used to copy boundreports.Two facing pages can be copied onto a singlesheet of paper without being divided into twosheets.

Book Erase - This format can be used to copy two facingpages in a book.The edge of the document can be erased(frame erasing) or the margin of the book canbe erased (center erasing) when copying.Both the frame and center erase functions canbe selected simultaneously.

• Frame Erase • Center Erase

Page 172: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 44 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting for Copying a Bound Document in Page Order:

• In book page order:This setting can be used to carry out 2-Sided copying of a bounddocument. Copying is divided into individual pages, and 2-Sidedcopying is carried out in the book page order. The optional DuplexUnit is required.

Setting for Copying a Bound Document in Page Order:

• Copying facing pages in a book onto both sides of a sheet of paper:This setting can be used to carry out 2-Sided copying of a bounddocument. Copying is divided into individual pages, and two facingpages are copied onto both sides of a single sheet of paper. Theoptional Duplex Unit is required.

Setting for Loading a Document:

• Selects the document direction (long side placed vertically orhorizontally) and document installation direction (placed vertically orhorizontally) when carrying out 2-Sided copying, 2in1 copying, 4in1copying, or copying a 2-Sided document.

• Failure to set the document direction and document installationdirection may result in the page order and copying direction to beincorrect.

Setting for the Margin of a Document:

• When a 1-Sided document with a margin is copied onto both sides ofa sheet of paper, or 2-Sided documents with margins are copied ontoa single side of paper, the position of the margin can be adjusted.

Page 173: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 45

Accessing the Orig.�Copy Screen

1. Press <Copy>.

2. Touch [Orig.�Copy].

Display changes to the [Orig.�Copy] screen.

3. Set the document and copy formats.

� Refer to Section 2.7 Selecting Formats for Various Original Documents and Section 2.8 Selecting the Various Copy Formats for setting the required document and copy formats.

4. Place the document and make the copy.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Page 174: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 46 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.7 Selecting Formats for Various Original Documents

The various document formats available on the NEC IT3520/IT2520 are listednext. Choose the document format in accordance with the original documentplaced in the ADF or Book Scanner.

Setting for 1-Sided Original Documents

1. Touch [1 Sided] on the [Orig.�Copy] screen.

� The selected key is displayed in reverse to show it is turned on.

� The factory default setting is [1 Sided -> 1 Sided].

Setting for 2-Sided Original Documents

1. Touch [2 Sided] on the [Orig.�Copy] screen.

� The selected key is displayed in reverse to show it is turned on. Each sheet of the document is automatically turned over and scanned.

Setting for Bound Documents (Book/Separation Copy, Book/Spreadsheet Copy, Book Erase)

1. Adjust the center of the bound document to the mark on the Book Scanner.

Page 175: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 47

2. Touch [Book] on the [Orig.�Copy] screen.

� Copying a bound document onto both sides of paper:You can select whether to copy in thesame order as the pages in a book, orto copy two facing pages onto bothsides of a sheet of paper.

� 2in1 copying, 4in1 copying, and Booklet Creation cannot be carried out when [Book] is selected.

� Refer to Setting for Copying Bound Documents in Page Order on page 2-53.

3. Touch [Standard Book] or [Right Bound].

� To Select:When [Standard Book] is touched,copying is carried out from the left pageto the right page.When [Right Bound] is touched,copying is carried out from the rightpage to the left page.

� The selected key is displayed in reverse.

4. Selecting the copy format required.

Setting for Bound Documents (Book/Separation Copy, Book/Spreadsheet Copy, Book Erase) (Continued)

Page 176: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 48 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.8 Selecting the Various Copy Formats

After making the original document format selection, the type of copy formatrequired must be selected. The various copy formats are listed next. Choosethe copy format in accordance with the original document format selection andthe required copy output needed.

Copying Two Facing Pages Individually (Book/Separation Copy)

1. Select [Separation] and touch [Enter].

Copying Two Facing Pages onto a Single Sheet of Paper (Book/Spreadsheet Copy)

1. Select [Spread-sheet] and touch [Enter].

Erasing the Edge and Margin of the Document when Copying (Book Erase)

1. Touch [Book Erase].

2. Select the position that the Book Erase function will apply to.

Page 177: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 49

3. Use the � or � arrow keys to set the area to be erased when copying.

4. Touch [Enter].

� To Select:Touch the � arrow under the followingdisplays to set the position to beerased.

� Figures ranging from 1/4 to 3/4 inch (5 to 20 mm) can be set as the frame erasing.The center erasing width is fixed to 1/2 inch (12 mm).Every time the [�] arrow is touched, the set value is decreased by 1/16 inch (1 mm).Every time the [�] arrow is touched, the set value is increased by 1/16 inch (1 mm).

Erasing the Edge and Margin of the Document when Copying (Book Erase)

To erase the edge ofthe document

To erase the margin

To erase both theedge and the marginof the document

Page 178: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 50 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting for 1-Sided Copying

1. Touch [1 Sided] on the right side of the [Orig.�Copy] screen.

Setting for 2-Sided Copying

1. Touch [2 Sided] on the right side of the [Orig.�Copy] screen.

� Copying bound documents onto both sides of paper:You can select whether to copy a bookin the same order as the pages in thebook, or to copy two facing pages ontoboth sides of a sheet of paper.

� For more information, refer to Setting for Copying Bound Documents in Page Order in Chapter 2 on page 2-53.

Setting for 1-Sided, 2in1 Copying

1. Touch [Single [2in1]] on the [Orig.�Copy] screen.

� When 2in1 copying is selected, the scaling factor (which has been preset earlier by the user) is automatically selected. The scaling factor can be overridden, if a different scaling factor is preferred. Refer to 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 on page 4-1.

Page 179: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 51

Setting for 2-Sided, 2in1 Copying

1. Touch [4in1/Booklet] on the [Orig.�Copy] screen.

2. Select [Double [2in1]] and touch [Enter].

� When 2in1 copying is selected, the scaling factor (which has been preset earlier by the user) is automatically selected. The scaling factor can be overridden if a different scaling factor is preferred. Refer to 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 on page 4-1.

Setting for 1-Sided, 4 in 1 Copying

1. Touch [4in1/Booklet] on the [Orig.�Copy] screen.

2. Select [Single [4in1]] and touch [Enter].

� When 4in1 copying is selected, the scaling factor (which has been preset earlier by the user) is automatically selected. The scaling factor can be overridden if a different scaling factor is preferred.

� The page order for 4in1 copying can be changed.

� Refer to 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 on page 4-1.

Page 180: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 52 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting for 2-Sided, 4 in 1 Copying

1. Touch [4in1/Booklet] on the [Orig.�Copy] screen.

2. Select [Double [4in1]] and touch [Enter].

� When 4in1 copying is selected, the scaling factor (which has been preset earlier by the user) is automatically selected. The scaling factor can be overridden if a different scaling factor is preferred.

� The page order for 4in1 copying can be changed.

� Refer to 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 on page 4-1.

Setting for Booklet Creation

1. Touch [4in1/Booklet] on the [Orig.�Copy] screen.

2. Select [Booklet Creation] and touch [Enter].

� When 4in1 copying is selected, the scaling factor (which has been preset earlier by the user) is automatically selected. The scaling factor can be overridden if a different scaling factor is preferred.

� When Booklet Creation is selected, making a crease, and center stapling can be set additionally.

Note: When Booklet Creation is selected, depending on the document set direction, the copying page order may change. Refer to Setting a Crease on page 2-36.

Page 181: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 53

Setting for Copying Bound Documents in Page Order

1. Adjust the center of the bound document to the mark on the Book Scanner.

2. Touch [Book] on the [Orig.�Copy] screen and select the direction of the bound document on the book screen, and touch [Enter].

3. Touch [2sided] on the right side of the [Orig.�Copy].

4. Touch [Page Order].

� Setting for Copying Bound Documents in page Order is available when 2-Sided copying of a bound document is carried out.

5. Select [Book-Order] or [Standard] and touch [Enter].

� When [Book-Order] is touched, the book is copied in the same order as the original layout.

� When [Standard] is touched, two facing pages are copied onto both sides of a single sheet of paper.

Page 182: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 54 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting for Loading a Document

1. Touch [Original Direction] on the [Orig.�Copy] screen.

2. Select the direction of a document and touch [Enter].

Additional information:

Setting for a Margin of a Document

1. Touch [Margin] on the [Orig.�Copy] screen.

2. Select the position for the document margin (left or top).

3. Use the � or � arrow to adjust the width of the margin and touch [Enter].

� To Select:Figures ranging from 0 to 3/4 inch (0 to20 mm) can be set.Every time the � is touched, the setvalue is decreased by 1/16 inch (1 mm).Every time the � is touched, the setvalue is increased by 1/16 inch (1 mm).

Page 183: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 55

2.9 Attaching Cover Sheets to Copies

Different types of paper, such as colored paper, can be used for cover sheetswhen at least two sets of a document are copied.

Before Starting Operations:� When attaching a cover sheet, the document should be set in the ADF. A cover sheet

cannot be attached if the original document is placed in the Book Scanner.

� Paper to be used for cover sheets should be inserted into a different paper cassette todistinguish it from cassettes with plain copy paper.

� Cover sheet paper should be inserted in the cassette in the same direction as the plainpaper used for copies.

� Both front and back cover sheets can be attached.

� Copying is possible on the cover sheet paper.

Methods of Attaching Cover Sheets

There are six variations for attaching cover sheets to a document.

1. Front Cover Sheet - Blank Back Cover Sheet - None

2. Front Cover Sheet - Blank Back Cover Sheet - Blank

3. Front Cover Sheet - Blank Back Cover Sheet - Copied on

Page 184: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 56 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

4. Front Cover Sheet - Copied on Back Cover Sheet - None

5. Front Cover Sheet - Copied on Back Cover Sheet - Blank

6. Front Cover Sheet - Copied on Back Cover Sheet - Copied on

Attaching Cover Sheets

1. Load the document in the Automatic Document Feeder.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Select [Auxiliary] and touch [Cover Mode].

Page 185: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 57

4. Select the method of attaching the Front and Back Covers, and touch the key for the cover sheet paper.

� To Select:Touch the keys for attaching theindividual front and back cover sheets.The selected keys are displayed inreverse.

� When the paper cassette in which the cover sheet paper is installed is displayed, touch [Enter] instead of the key for cover sheet paper.

5. Touch the key for the paper cassette containing the cover sheet paper and touch [Enter].

6. Touch [Enter].

7. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Attaching Cover Sheets (Continued)

Page 186: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 58 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.10 Inserting Separators (Page Insertion)

Different types of paper, such as colored paper, can be used as separatorsheets when at least two sets of a document are copied.

Before Starting Operations:� This function may not be available depending on the model.

� The document must be loaded into the ADF for this function to operate. The separatorfunction does not work when using the Book Scanner.

� Paper of a different size or direction must be inserted into the original document at therequired separator position.

� Paper used for the separator (printed output) should be installed into a different papercassette than the normal print paper cassette.

� Copying is possible on the paper used for separator sheets.

� This function can be used together with the cover sheet function.

� This function cannot be used together with Booklet Creation or when using mixeddocuments.

Examples of Inserting Separators

Separators are inserted into the copies wherever paper of a different size ordirection is found in the original document during copying.

• Non-Copied Inserts

• Copied Inserts

Page 187: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 59

Inserting the Separators

1. Load the document in the Automatic Document Feeder.

� Be sure to insert different sized paper (into the original document) in the position that separator sheets placement is required.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Select [Auxiliary] and touch [Page Insertion].

4. Select [With Image] or [Blank] on the separator sheet (whether to print on the sheet), and touch the key for the cassette containing the separator paper.

� If the paper cassette in which the separator paper is installed is displayed, touch [Enter] instead of the key for the separator paper.

5. Touch the key of the paper cassette containing the separator paper and touch [Enter].

Page 188: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 60 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.11 Copying and Overhead Projector Interleaving

Separators can be inserted between the Overhead Projector (OHP)transparency copies as they are printed.

Before Starting Operations:� Paper for the separators should be installed in a paper cassette. The OHP sheets

should be installed in the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

� Paper with the same size as the OHP sheets should be used for the separator andinserted in the same direction.

� Copying is possible on the separators (interleaves).

� Using this feature, numbers of copies cannot be selected.

Examples of Inserting Separators between OHP Sheets

Separators can be inserted between OHP sheets and can be either blank orcan have copy printed on them.

• Non-Copied Interleaves (Blank)

• Copied Interleaves (Copied Image)

6. Touch [Enter].

7. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Inserting the Separators (Continued)

Page 189: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 61

Inserting OHP Interleaves

1. Load the document in the unit.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Select [Auxiliary] and touch [OHP Interleaving].

4. Select [With Image] or [Blank] on the OHP Interleaving screen.

5. Touch the key for the separator paper.

� If the paper cassette in which the OHP sheets are installed is displayed, this operation is not required.

Page 190: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 62 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.12 Setting Up File Margins

Margins for binding a file can be set up by shifting the image while stillincluding all the printing area. The position of the binder margin can beselected either at the left side edge or at the top edge. The margin width canalso be selected.

6. Touch the key for the paper cassette in which the OHP Interleaving sheets are installed, then touch [Enter].

7. Touch [Enter].

8. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Inserting OHP Interleaves (Continued)

Left side edge Top edge

Page 191: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 63

Setting Up File Margins

1. Load the document in the unit.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Select [Auxiliary] and touch [File Margin].

4. Touch the [�] key to set the file margin position (at the left or at the top).

� Copying Style:When Left is selected for the file marginposition, both the front and back of thedocument is copied in the samedirection as the original.

When Top is selected, the back of thedocument is copied upside-down to theoriginal document.

Page 192: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 64 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.13 Erasing a Portion of the Document

Some areas of the document can be erased to eliminate shadow marks leftfrom the punched holes, or other marks. It is also convenient for erasingheader data from facsimiles and any other printing in border areas.

To Erase:

5. Use the [�]or [�] arrow to select the file margin width, then touch [Enter].

� To Select:Figures ranging from 0 to 3/4 inch (0 to20 mm) can be set.Every time the DOWN arrow is touched,the set value is decreased by 1/16 inch(1 mm).Every time the UP arrow is touched, theset value is increased by 1/16inch(1 mm).

� The copy image may be lost if the file margin width is set more than is necessary. An appropriate size must be set for the file margin width.

6. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Erase Mode

1. Load the document in the unit.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

Setting Up File Margins (Continued)

• Left edge erasing mode • Top edge erasing mode • Frame erasing mode

Page 193: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 65

3. Select [Auxiliary], and touch [Edge/Frame Erase].

4. Touch [�] arrow to set the erased position. Choices are: Left Edge erase, Top Edge erase, or Frame erase.

5. Touch [�] or [�] arrow to select the width to be erased, then touch [Enter].

� To Select:Figures ranging from 1/4 to 3/4 inch (5to 20 mm) can be set.Every time [�] arrow is touched, the setvalue is decreased by 1/16 inch (1 mm).Every time [�] arrow is touched, the setvalue is increased by 1/16 inch (1 mm).

� The width to be erased is in accordance to the original document’s dimensions. Therefore, care must be taken when enlarging or reducing the image so that no information is lost or distorted.

6. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Erase Mode (Continued)

Page 194: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 66 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.14 Repeated Copying on a Single Sheet

One sheet of a document can be repeatedly copied onto one sheet of copypaper.

Examples of Image Repeating

� When Ledger (11" by 17") is selected as the copy paper size and directmode is set as the zoom ratio to copy a Letter-sized document:

� When Letter (8 1/2" by 11") is selected as the paper size and 0.500(50%) is set as the zoom ratio to copy a Letter-sized document:

Image Repeating

1. Load the document in the unit.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Select [Auxiliary], and touch [Image Repeat].

Page 195: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 67

4. Select the document size.

Automatic Size Detection:

1. Touch [Auto Detect], then touch [Enter].

Regular Size (Letter or Legal):

1. Touch [Size Input].

2. Select the document size, then touch [Enter].

Image Repeating (Continued)

Page 196: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 68 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Irregular Size (any size other than Letter/Legal)

1. Touch [Size Input].

2. Touch [Custom Size].

Irregular Size (Continued)3. Touch [X ] to enter the

horizontal length and [Y ] to enter the vertical length of the original, then touch [Enter].

� To Select:Touching [X] and [Y] moves thecursor.When selecting the dimensions,enter the size after touching [X] or[Y].Width (X) can be set ranging from1 to 17 inches (25 to 432 mm).

Length (Y) can be set ranging

from 1 to 11 11/16 inches (25 to297 mm).

Use [�] or [�] arrow to selectthe width and length.

5. Touch [Enter].

6. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Image Repeating (Continued)

Page 197: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 69

2.15 Numbering Each Set of Copies

Printing a number for each printed set of a document is possible. The numberis printed as a background image and can be useful to track distribution ofcopied sets, or when handling confidential documents.

Before Starting Operations:� Numbers are printed as a background image for each copied set.

� When the Distribution function is set, ’sort’ mode is automatically selected as thefinishing setting.

� Three levels of contrast can be selected for the printed numbers.

� When the printed number reach 999, the number resets to 000.

� The initial number can be selected by the operator.

Setting for the Numbering Function

1. Load the document in the unit.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Select [Auxiliary], then touch [Image Settings].

Page 198: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 70 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

4. Touch [Distribution #].

5. Select the Distribution function.

Selecting the Initial Printed Number:

1. Use the 10-key pad to enter the initial number.

� To Select:Numbers can range from 000 to 999.To set the initial number to 003, enter ’3’.

� If no initial number is set, numbering starts at 001.

Selecting Which Pages are Numbered:

1. Touch [First page only] or [All Pages].

� To Select:When [First page only] is touched, the number will just be printed on the first page ofeach printed set.When [All Pages] is touched, every page of the set is printed with the distributionnumber.

Selecting the Contrast for the Printed Number:

1. Select the desired contrast for the printed number. Choices are: [Darker], [Normal], and [Lighter].

6. Touch [Enter].

Setting for the Numbering Function (Continued)

Page 199: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 71

2.16 Printing a Water Mark on the Copy Paper

A special message, called a Water Mark, can be printed on the paper’sbackground when copying. Examples include [TOP SECRET][CONFIDENTIAL] [DRAFT], etc.

Before Starting Operations:� There are seven Water Mark messages.

� The Water Mark can be printed on the first page or on all the pages.

7. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Printing a Water Mark on the Paper

1. Load the document in the unit.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Select the [Auxiliary] menu and touch [Image Settings].

Setting for the Numbering Function (Continued)

Page 200: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 72 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

4. Touch [Water Mark].

5. Select the Water Mark to print.

� To select the Water Mark:Touch the key for the mark you wantprinted. When selected, the key willbe highlighted. Touch [Cancel] tocancel.

� To set the pages for the Water Mark:Touch either [First Page Only] or [AllPages].

[First Page Only]: Touch this to printthe Water Mark only on the firstcopied page.

[All Pages]: Touch this to print theWater mark on all copied pages.

6. Touch [Enter].

7. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Printing a Water Mark on the Paper

Page 201: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 73

2.17 Black-White Reverse Copying

This feature reverses the black/white contrast of the manuscript whencopying.

Before Starting Operations:� Images created by the machine, such as Distribution Number or a Water Mark, will not

be reversed.

� The black/white image cannot be reversed after the document has been already beenscanned.

2.18 Separate Scanning

When a document with a large number of pages is copied, the whole set canbe copied by dividing the pages for scanning.

When the Numbering function is set, a multiple-paged document can becopied with continuous numbering.

Before Starting Operations:� Scanning is suspended when memory becomes full. In this case, press <Start> to

print the document until the stage that has already been scanned.

Black-White Reverse Copying

1. Load the document in the unit.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Select [Auxiliary], then touch [Black-White Reverse].

� [Black-White Reverse] will be highlighted.

4. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Page 202: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 74 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Using the Book Scanner for Separate Scanning

1. Load the document in the Book Scanner.

� For more information, Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Select [Auxiliary] and touch [Separate Scan].

4. Press <Start>. Scanning will now begin.

5. After scanning is complete, load the next document page in the Book Scanner, then press <Start>.

� Repeat this operation until the whole document is completely scanned.

Page 203: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 75

6. Touch [Finish] when all scanning is completed.

� To add documents to be scanned:Touch [Continue] to re-start scanning.Place the page on the glass and press<Start>.

7. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Using the Automatic Document Feeder for Separate Scanning

1. Load the document in the Automatic Document Feeder.

� For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

2. Press <Copy>.

3. Select [Auxiliary] and touch [Separate Scan].

4. Press <Start>. The document will now begin to scan.

� To Suspend Scanning:Press <Stop>.

Using the Book Scanner for Separate Scanning (Continued)

Page 204: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 76 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.19 Using Copy Programs

Copying functions used frequently can be registered and accessed asnecessary. For example, if you frequently use the same zoom and densitysettings, these parameters can be registered into a key for convenient recall.

Before Starting Operations:� Registration is required in advance. For details on Copy Program registration, refer to

Section 3.2 Registering Copy Programs in Chapter 4 on page 4-84.

� The following items can be registered in combination as Copy Programs:

5. After scanning is complete, load the next document page in the feeder, then press [Continue].

� Repeat this operation until the whole document is completely scanned.

6. Touch [Finish] when all scanning is completed.

7. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

• Number of Copies • Image Settings

• Zoom • Separate Scanning

• Sorting • Copy Paper Size

• Cover Sheets • Density

• OHP Interleaving • Mixed Original Detection

Using the Automatic Document Feeder for Separate Scanning (Continued)

Page 205: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 2 - 77

• Edge/Frame Erase • Page Insertion

• File Margin • Black-White Reverse

• Image Repeating

Using the Copy Programs

1. Press <Utility>, and select [Copy Job Recall].

2. Select the program to be used.

3. Load the document and <Start>. Copying will now begin.

� To select the copy program:Only keys in which copy programs areregistered are displayed. Touch the keywith the desired functions programmed.

Page 206: IT3520_2520 User Manual

2 - 78 Copy Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 207: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 1

Chapter 3 Registration and

Setting Operations

SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

This chapter describes how to register information into the NEC IT3520/IT2520 andhow to enable its many useful features.

1.1 Describing the Registration and Setting Screens

The main Registration and Setting displays are accessed by pressing the<Utility> key. The screen shown below includes keys that are indicated onlywhen the optional devices are connected.

Figure 3-1 Main Utility Screen

Page 208: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 2 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

1.2 User Set Screen

The screen shown below is for registration of various functions.

1.3 Copy Job Program Recall Screen

This screen displays copy job programs.

Figure 3-2 User Set Screen

Figure 3-3 Copy Job Program Recall Screen

Page 209: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 3

1.4 User Management Screen

The screen shown is for setting the basic management operations and forroutine care to use the NEC IT3520/IT2520 properly.

1.5 Administrator Management Screen

When in the Registration screen, touching the Administrator key givesaccess to the Administrator Management screen. Access to the AdministratorManagement screen is restricted to those user(s) having an AdministratorCode. While in this screen, the machine’s administrator can register and setfeatures that are restricted from normal users. The AdministratorManagement Screen is composed of two screens: [Admin. 1] and[Admin. 2]. Refer to Figure 3-5 Administrator Management Screens.

Figure 3-4 User Management Screen

Figure 3-5 Administrator Management Screens

Page 210: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 4 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

1.6 Report Screen

This screen is used to print various reports/lists (used to confirm the status ofthe machine), and the status of registration of various functions.

1.7 Required Initial Registration/Settings and Confirmation

In order to properly use and benefit from this product, certain information mustbe registered in advance. Items such as the current date and time, theTransmitter Subscriber’s Identification (TSI), Self-ID, Self Telephone Number,One-Touch numbers, etc., are needed to use the machine to its fullcapabilities.

Various settings, including settings for printing styles of reports, have alreadybeen set at the factory before shipment. Those settings (defaults) can bechanged to meet the needs of the business.

The following items must be registered before use:

� Time and Date

� Self-Telephone Number - the telephone number of the fax line.

� TSI - the name of your company or business and the facsimile numberthat is printed at the top of every transmitted fax page.

� Self-ID - the name of the company and the facsimile number which maybe displayed on the receiver’s machine.

Figure 3-6 Report Screen

Page 211: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 5

It is recommended that the following items be registered to effectively use theunit:

� One-Touch Dialing keys

� Index keys

� Programmed keys

1.8 Entering Characters for Registration

This section explains how characters are entered as part of the registrationprocess for items such as the TSI, One-Touch keys, and any other feature thatrequires characters.

Before Starting Operations:� Use the character keys to select the desired characters.

� Use the 10-key Pad to enter numeric information.

Entering Characters

Alphanumeric Screen:

This screen is used to enter alphanumeric characters and symbols.

Characters entered will appear in this area

Character selection area

[ � ] [ � ] : Moves the Cursor.

[ Del. ] : Deletes the character at the cursor position.

[ SPACE ] : Enters a space.

[Alpha ] : Touch to display the symbol screen.

[Caps ] : Touch to enter uppercase characters.

Page 212: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 6 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Symbol Screen:

This screen is used to enter the symbols.

Entering Alphanumeric Characters and Symbols

1. Touch a character key to enter the character.

� To enter Capital (uppercase) characters:Touch [Caps] before entering thecharacter.

� To enter Symbols:Touch [Alpha] to display the Symbolscreen.

� To delete characters:Move the cursor over the character tobe deleted and touch [Del.]. Touch[�][�] to move the cursor.

� To clear all characters:Press <C> (Clear key).

Characters entered will appear in this area

Character selection area

[ � ] [ � ] : Moves the Cursor.

[ Del. ] : Deletes the character at the cursor position.

[ SPACE ] : Enters a space.

[ Symbol ] : Touch to display the alphanumeric screen.

[ Caps ] : Touch to enter uppercase characters.

� The ¯ and ~ keys will display as ~ (tilde).

Page 213: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 7

SECTION 2 BASIC SETTINGS AND REGISTRATION OPERATION

In order for the NEC IT3520/2520 to properly and efficiently run, it is necessary to setcertain functions and register information into the machine. This is typically done by asingle key user, or administrator, who is in charge of seeing that parameters such aspasswords, report printing, date and time accuracy, facsimile numbers, and others areproperly entered. These basic settings and registration details will be covered in thefollowing sections.

2.1 Basic Settings

This section will explain setting items required for basic operation of the NECIT3520/2520.

The following are basic settings:

� Setting the Confirmation Beep, Alarm Buzzer, and Line MonitorVolume

Setting the Confirmation Beep, Alarm Buzzer, and Line Monitor Volume:

You can adjust the volume of the confirmation beep of the touch panel, thealarm volume (paper out, paper jam, communication error, etc.), and the linemonitor volume (ringer tone, facsimile answer tone, etc.).

2. Touch [Enter]. The characters are registered.

� If [Enter] is not displayed:According to the registration screen,another key (such as [Next]) may bedisplayed instead of [Enter].

Entering Alphanumeric Characters and Symbols (Continued)

Setting the Volume

1. Press <Utility>.

Page 214: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 8 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Select [User Management].

3. Select the sound volume to be adjusted.

� To set the Confirmation beep:Touch [Confirmation Beep] to set thevolume of the touch panel keymanipulation. The default setting is ’3’.It also beeps when the operation is notaccepted.

� To set the Alarm volume:Touch [Alarm Volume] to set the alarmvolume, which is heard whenever aproblem develops (such as a paperjam). The default setting is ’3’.

� To set the Line Monitor Volume:Touch [Line Monitor Volume] to set thespeaker volume heard when themachine dials a facsimile number, forexample. The default setting is ’3’.

4. Touch [�] or [�] to select the volume, then touch [Enter].

� To Select:Six volume levels (0 to 5) can be set.The sound gets louder as the numbergets larger.

Set to ’0’ to turn off the sound.

5. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Setting the Volume (Continued)

Page 215: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 9

2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen

This section describes how to access the Administrator Management screenand how various functions are set and information registered. Theadministrator is typically the person who manages the machine and isresponsible for seeing that all aspects of using the unit are maintained.

Accessing the Administrator Management Screen

1. Press <Utility>.

2. Select [Admin. Management].

3. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the Administrator Number (up to eight digits), then touch [Enter].

� This screen is not displayed unless an Administrator Number has been registered.

� Refer to Section 2.8 Registering the Administrator Number on page 3-22.

4. Select either [Admin. 1] or [Admin. 2], and on the Administrator Management screen choose the function for registration and set.

Page 216: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 10 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.3 Setting the Date and Time

Before starting to use the machine, the current date and time should be set.This setting is very important, as all reports, transmissions, and receptions willhave the date and time printed on them. What’s more, any timed operation(e.g. Timer Transmission, Polling, Broadcasting, etc.) depends on the correctdate and time.

Before Starting Operations:� Enter the calendar year in the four-digit format.

� Enter the time in the 24-hour format.

� If the date and time need adjustment, use the same procedure to correct them.

5. After completing registration or setting, touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the stand-by screen is displayed.

Setting the Date and Time

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administration Management screen, and touch [Initial Settings].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2. Touch [Date/Time Set].

Accessing the Administrator Management Screen (Continued)

Page 217: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 11

3. Touch [Time Date].

4. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the date and time.

� To setup:Use the 10-key pad to enter the data inthe order of year, month, date, hour,and minute. Example: 11:32, April 23, 2003, touch: [2] [0] [0] [3] [0] [4] [2] [3] [1] [1][3] [2].To adjust the date or time, touch the key([Year] [Month] [Hour] [Minute]) neededto adjust.

� To modify:Press <Clear> (Clear key) and re-enterthe data.

5. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Setting the Date and Time (Continued)

Page 218: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 12 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.4 Setting the Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time

The time zone can be set in accordance with the location of the machine. Forexample, if the IT3520/IT2520 is installed in New York, the time zone setting isset for -5:00 GMT (Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) is the world-wide timereference standard, where clocks can be set in accordance to the time inGreenwich, England). A setting for Daylight Saving Time can also be set.

Before Starting Operations:� The time zone setting that is attached to the e-mail header transmission and reception

can be set to a 30-minute difference from standard time.

� The standard time zone for North America (east coast) market models is set to -5:00UTC. The factory default setting is -5:00.

Setting the Time Zone

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administration Management screen, and touch [Initial Settings].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2. Touch [Date/Time Set].

Page 219: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 13

3. Touch [Time Zone].

4. Touch [�] or [�] to set the proper time zone, then touch [Enter].

5. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Setting Daylight Saving Time (D.S.T.)

1. Touch [D.S.T.].

2. Touch [Auto] or [OFF] to set the Daylight Saving Time.

� The factory default setting is [Auto].

� When in the [Auto] setting, one hour is automatically added to the unit’s clock on the first Sunday in April, and one hour is subtracted on the last Sunday in October.

� For those areas not observing D.S.T., the setting should be [OFF].

Setting the Time Zone

Page 220: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 14 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting the Language for TSI, Reports, etc.

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administration Management screen, and touch [Initial Settings].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2. Touch [Language (Com.)].

3. Select one of the languages, then touch [Enter].

� Some of the reports stay in English, even if you select another language.

4. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the standby screen.

Page 221: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 15

2.5 Registering the Telephone Number

This section explains the method of registering the Self-Telephone Number,PSTN/Extension Line Switch, and Line Type for sending and receiving a Fax.

About the Telephone Number:

� Self-Telephone Number - This is simply the facsimile telephone numberused at this machine, and it identifies this unit at the remote destination.

� PSTN/Extension Line Switch - When connected to a Private BranchExchange (PBX), the unit may not correctly execute facsimilecommunication as is. A setting is made to allow communication via aPBX. The factory default is set for use on an external line (notconnected to a PBX).

� Line Type - There are two methods of dialing on telephone lines: Touch-tone dialing (PB) and Dial-Pulse (DP10, DP20) dialing. Dialing afacsimile telephone number is impossible if the correct method of dialingdoes not match the type of line used were the machine is installed.Register the type of dialing method used by the NEC IT3520/IT2520.PB (Push Button, or Touch-tone style) dialing is the factory defaultsetting.

Before Starting Operations:� Up to 20-digits can be registered as the number.

� This number may be printed on report(s) or list(s) at the destination. It isrecommended that the full telephone number be registered (including the area code)and that this number be corrected if a new facsimile telephone number is issued.

� This same procedure is used to modify a currently registered Self-Telephone Number.

Registering and Modifying the Self-Telephone Number

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management Screen, and touch [Initial Settings].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

Page 222: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 16 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Touch [Self-telephone # Information].

� When the 2nd G3 Port model is used: When the optional 2nd G3 Port isinstalled, two separate facsimiletelephone numbers will be issued. Touch [Self-telephone #1 Information],or [Self-telephone #2 Information] toregister each facsimile number.

3. Touch [Self-telephone #].

4. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the facsimile telephone number, then touch [Enter].

� To re-enter the number: Use [ � ] or [ � ] to move the cursorand re-enter the number, or press <C>(Clear key) to re-enter it.Touch [Delete] to erase a character onthe cursor. Touch [Cancel] to cancel the procedure.

� To use International Codes:Touch [+] to register the Internationaltelephone code, and enter ’1’ as thecountry code for the United States.

Registering and Modifying the Self-Telephone Number (Continued)

Page 223: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 17

Setting for an External Line or PBX

1. Touch [PSTN/Ext Line Switch].

2. Select [Extension] or [PSTN].

� To select:Touch [PSTN] to connect directly to atelephone line.Touch [Extension] to connect to atelephone line via the PBX (forexample, if a ’9’ must be dialed to gainaccess to an outside line).

To select [PSTN]:

1. Touch [PSTN] and [Enter].

To select [Extension]:1. Touch [Extension].

2. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the digit required by the PBX to access an external line, then touch [Enter].

3. Touch [Enter] again.

Page 224: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 18 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting the Line Type

1. Touch [Line Type].

2. Select the key for the telephone line type currently used, then touch [Enter].

� To select:[DP20] - touch this when a 20 pulsesper second dial line is used.

[DP10] - touch this when a 10 pulsesper second dial line is used.

[PB] - touch this when a Touch-tonetype line is used. This will be themajority of cases.

3. Confirm the dial type when the screen returns to the same as in step 1. Touch [Enter] if the data is correct.

� To modify:Touch [Line Type] to change thesetting.

4. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Page 225: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 19

2.6 Registering the Transmitter Subscriber’s Identification (TSI)

The TSI is the main identification of the NEC IT3520/2520. The TSI consistsof the business (or company name) and the facsimile telephone number of themachine. It is much like the Self-ID, however, the TSI is send to the receivingmachine and prints at the top of every received page as an important identifier.

Before Starting Operations:� A maximum of eight TSI can be registered. Different TSI may be set for each

destination or department.

� The TSI is required on all facsimile transmissions. It is illegal not to register this TSI,or to turn off this feature. Refer to Section 1.5 Transmitter Subscriber’s Identificationin Regulatory and Safety Information on page 6.

� Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be registered in the TSI.

� The same procedure is used to modify the TSI.

Registering and Modifying the TSI

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management Screen, and touch [Initial Settings].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2. Touch [TSI Registration].

Page 226: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 20 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3. Select the TSI to register.

4. Enter the TSI, then touch [Enter].

� Refer to Section 1.8 Entering Characters for Registration on page 3-5.

5. Confirm the registered TSI when the screen returns to the same as in step 2. Touch [Enter] if the TSI is correct.

� To modify:Touch [TSI] to re-register.

6. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Registering and Modifying the TSI (Continued)

Page 227: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 21

2.7 Registering the Self-ID

The Self-ID is the name of your company and the machine’s facsimile numberthat prints on the management report and also is displayed on the panel of thereceiving unit. It is convenient for allowing the destination to confirm who senta document.

Before Starting Operations:� Up to 12 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be registered as the ID.

� This same procedure is used to modify an existing Self-ID.

� The Self-ID may not be displayed at the destination (depends on maker and model).In this case, the Self-Telephone Number is displayed.

Self-ID Registration and Modification

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management Screen, and touch [Initial Settings].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2. Touch [Self-ID].

Page 228: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 22 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.8 Registering the Administrator Number

Responsibility of registering information into the NEC IT3520/2520 and settingfunctions in the machine is performed by the administrator. To enter into theAdministrator Management Mode, the administrator must first enter anadministrator number. This number is simply a password to prohibitunauthorized users from modifying registered information.

Before Starting Operations:� If an administrator number is not registered, the administrator management menu can

still be operated without entering a number.

3. Enter the Self-ID and touch [Enter].

� Refer to Section 1.8 Entering Characters for Registration on page 3-5.

4. Confirm the registration details after the display returns to the screen shown in step 2. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

� To modify:Touch [Self-ID] to re-register.

5. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Self-ID Registration and Modification (Continued)

Page 229: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 23

Registering the Administrator Number

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management Screen, and touch [Admin. Set].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2. Touch [Administrator Number].

3. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the password of the administrator (up to eight digits), then touch [Enter].

� To re-enter the number:Use [�] or [�] to move the cursor andre-enter the number, or press <C> to re-enter the number.

When [Delete] is touched, the characteron the cursor is deleted.

When [Cancel] is touched, it returns tothe initial status.

4. Confirm the setting details when the screen returns as that shown in step 2. Touch [Enter] if the setting is correct.

� To modify:Touch [Administrator Number] to re-register.

Page 230: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 24 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.9 Setting the Account Management Mode

Unauthorized use of the NEC IT3520/2520 can be prohibited, or the numberof copies made by each account can be restricted. Passwords are set foreach department, or for individual account.

Before Starting Operations:� When Limited is set, the unit cannot be used without selecting the account

(department or individual account).

� The factory default setting is Open.

5. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Setting the Account Management Mode

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management Screen, and touch [Account Management].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2. Touch [Account Management Mode].

Registering the Administrator Number (Continued)

Page 231: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 25

2.10 Registering Accounts

When account registration is completed for individual users or departments ina company, each Account can restrict the number of pages that can be printedper account.

Unauthorized use can be avoided by registering a password for each user ordepartment.

User Registration items:

� Account Name:Account’s (department or individual user) name is registered. Up to 12characters may be registered.

� Access Number:Register this to restrict the accounts.

� Account Number:Register a number for each account.

� Maximum Print Page:This is set to restrict the number of pages that can be printed peraccount. Input range is 0 to 999, 999 pages.

3. Select [Limited] or [Open], then touch [Enter].

4. Account Selection Screen displays.

� If Open is selected:The display returns to the stand-byscreen when [Open] is selected.

Setting the Account Management Mode (Continued)

Page 232: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 26 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Registering Accounts

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management Screen, and touch [Account Reg].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2. Touch a key that is not yet registered.

� If a key has already been registered, the information can be changed by touching that key.

3. Registering account information.

Registering the Account’s Name:

1. Touch [Account Name].

2. Enter the Account Name, then touch [Enter].

Page 233: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 27

Registering the Access Number:

1. Touch [Access Number].

2. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the Access Number (six digits), then touch [Enter].

� When an Access Number has not been registered, the user selection screen can be used without entering an Access number.

� Press <C> to re-enter a number.

� Touch [Cancel] to return to the initial screen.

Registering the Account’s Number:

1. Touch [Account Number].

2. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the Account’s Number (four digits), then touch [Enter].

� Press <C> to re-enter the number.

Registering Accounts (Continued)

Page 234: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 28 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.11 Registering Passwords for Secured Communications

Passwords can be registered that allow both reception and transmission offacsimiles only when a match is made with the reception or transmission site.These passwords offer a level of security so the facsimile is sent to, orreceived by, the correct party. This section describes registering a passwordto carry out password communications.

Before Starting Operations:� A communication password is used for Password Transmission or Password

Reception.

Registering the Maximum Print Page Setting:

1. Touch [Max. Print Page]. 2. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the

maximum number of sheets to be printed, then touch [Enter].

� Enter 000000 for no printing limit.

4. Confirm the setting details when the screen returns as that shown in step 3. Touch [Enter] if the setting is correct.

� To modify:Touch the key for the item to bemodified and re-register it.

5. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Registering Accounts (Continued)

Page 235: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 29

� The password-protected transmission (Password TX On) setting is reset uponcompletion of each transmission. For details, refer to Section 2.1 Changing the InitialSettings in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-1.

� The factory default setting is Password not required for reception (CommunicationPassword:00). For details, refer to Section 3.2 Selecting Password Reception inChapter 6 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations on page 6-32.

Registering the Password for Password Communications

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management Screen, and touch [FAX Settings].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2. Select [Password Com.] and touch [Com. Password].

Page 236: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 30 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.12 Registering One-Touch Keys

One-Touch keys add the convenience and speed of dialing a pre-registeredfacsimile number, along with other registered data, at the touch of a single key.Misdialing a facsimile number is eliminated and the user can quickly andaccurately send their document.

Items to be registered:

� Destination Name:The One-Touch key is labeled with the destination’s name or location.Up to 12 characters can be registered.

� Destination Number:Register the telephone number (64-digits maximum), transmissionspeed, F-Code.

� Communication Mode:Register the communication mode.

3. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the communication password (two digits), then touch [Enter].

� To re-enter the number:Press <C> (clear key) and re-enter thenumber. When [Cancel] is touched, itreturns to the initial status.

4. Confirm the setting details when the screen returns as that shown in step 2. Touch [Enter] if the setting is correct.

� To modify:Touch [Com. Password] to re-register.

5. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Registering the Password for Password Communications (Continued)

Page 237: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 31

Before Starting Operations:� There are 36 One-Touch dial screens, and up to 540 destinations can be registered

(15 destinations per screen X 36 screens = 540 destinations).

� It is easier to retrieve the destinations by making an index to classify them when theyare registered. Refer to Section 2.13 Registering an Index for One-Touch Keys onpage 3-39.

� Make sure that the facsimile number is registered correctly to avoid erroneous dialingand incomplete transmissions.

� The registered data can be modified or deleted. Also, the display position of the One-Touch key can be modified.

Confirmation of the Registered Details:

A One-Touch list can be printed to verify the data. Refer to Section 1.3Printing the One-Touch Key List in Chapter 7 Reports and Lists on page 7-4.

Registering One-Touch Keys

1. Press <Utility>, and touch [User Set].

2. Touch [FAX Input].

Page 238: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 32 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3. Touch [One-Touch].

4. Select the desired One-Touch key to be registered.

� The initial screen for the Index is automatically displayed. Touch [� ] [ � ], [Index List], or the tab for the index to search for the desired One-Touch key.

5. Enter the destination’s name to be displayed on the One-Touch key, then touch [Next].

� These symbols are not available for One-Touch keys:" ^ \ | ; : * / ? . , ( ) [ ] < >

6. Select the communications mode, then touch [Next].

� This screen is displayed only when the optional 2nd G3 Port is installed.

� [G3-1] and [G3-2] represent the two facsimile telephone lines connected to the machine. This setting selects which line the machine will choose when dialing a destination.

Registering One-Touch Keys (Continued)

Page 239: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 33

7. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the facsimile number of the destination, then touch [Next].

� The destination’s facsimile number can be up to 64 digits.

� A three second pause may be added to the number by pressing <Pause>.

� If the NEC IT3520/2520 is set for dial pulse (DP) dialing, a touch-tone can be dialed by touching [Tone].

� Refer to Overseas (International) Transmission on page 3-34, and Registering the F-Code on page 3-34, as needed.

8. Confirm the registered information. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

� To modify:Select the item to modify and re-register it.

9. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

� To register consecutively:

Repeat the procedure fromstep 3.

Registering One-Touch Keys (Continued)

Page 240: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 34 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Overseas (International) Transmission

1. Perform the same procedure as steps 1 to 6 under Registering the One-Touch Keys.

� Refer to Registering One-Touch Keys on page 3-31.

2. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the facsimile number of the destination, then touch [Overseas].

� [Overseas] is displayed in reverse, showing that this mode is enabled.

3. Touch [Next].

4. Confirm the registered details. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

� To modify:Select the item to be modified, andreregister it.

5. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Registering the F-Code

1. Perform the same procedure as steps 1 to 6 under Registering the One-Touch Keys.

� Refer to Registering One-Touch Keys on page 3-31.

Page 241: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 35

2. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the facsimile number of the destination, then touch [F-CODE].

3. Select the key for the item to be registered.

� Refer to Section 2.14 F-CODE in Chapter 6 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations on page 6-22.

4. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the F-Code, then touch [Enter].

5. Confirm the registered details. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

� To modify:Select the item to be modified, and re-register it.

6. Touch [Next].

7. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Registering the F-Code (Continued)

Page 242: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 36 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Registering the Communications Speed

1. Perform the same procedure as steps 1 to 6 under Registering the One-Touch key.

2. Set the communication speed:

1. Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the facsimile number of the destina-tion then touch [Speed].

3. Touch [ � ] or [ � ] to select the communication speed, then touch [Enter].

4. Touch [Next].

5. Confirm the registered details. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

� To modify:Select the item to be modified, and re-register it.

6. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Page 243: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 37

Modifying and Deleting Information

1. Perform the same procedure as in steps 1 to 3 under Registering One-Touch Keys.

� Refer to Registering One-Touch Keys on page 3-31.

2. Touch a One-Touch key to be modified.

3. Select the tab for the item to be modified, then change the registered details.

� To modify:Select the tab for the item to bemodified from: [Dest.], [Mode1], and[Mode 2] menus. For details, refer toRegistering One-Touch Keys on page3-31.

� To delete:Confirm the registered details, andtouch [Del.].

4. Confirm the registered details. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

� To modify:Select the item to be modified, and re-register it.

5. Touch [Enter] repeatedly [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Copying a One-Touch Key

1. Perform the same procedure as steps 1 to 7 under Registering One-Touch Keys.

� Refer to Registering One-Touch Keys on page 3-31

Page 244: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 38 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Select [One-Touch] and touch [One-Touch Copy].

3. Touch the desired One-Touch Key.

4. Confirm that the One-Touch Key has been copied. Touch [Enter] if it is correct.

5. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Copying a One-Touch Key

Page 245: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 39

2.13 Registering an Index for One-Touch Keys

It is much easier to operate the NEC IT3520/IT2520 if the one-touch keyshave been registered in an organized fashion (e.g. by region, branch,alphabetically, etc.). The Index Keys provide a convenient method oforganizing the one-touch keys.

Before Starting Operations:� The index key name can be up to eight characters.

� There are 36 index keys, and up to 540 destinations can be registered (up to 15destination per index key display page).

Registering Index Keys

1. Press <Utility>.

2. Select [User Set], then touch [FAX Input].

Index tab

Page 246: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 40 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3. Touch [Index].

4. Select an index key to be registered.

5. Enter the index key name, then touch [Enter].

� Refer to Section 1.8 Entering Characters for Registration on page 3-5.

6. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

� To register consecutively:Repeat the procedure from step 3.

Registering Index Keys (Continued)

Page 247: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 41

2.14 Registering Program Keys

Program keys are special keys registered to carry out routine functions at thetouch of a single key. If the same action is performed frequently (such assending documents to multiple destinations at a specific time, or making a2-sided transmission with a certain image quality, etc.), the program key maybe registered so that all the needed features occur at the touch of a key.

Details that can be Registered:

The following three types of programs can be registered, as well asdestination data.

� Transmission Program:Image Quality, Contrast, Reduction, Real-time Transmission,Priority Transmission, Timer Transmission, TSI, DestinationInsertion, Transmission Report, Remote Copying, PasswordTransmission, 2in1 Transmission, 2-Sided Transmission, and TXMarker stamping can be registered in program keys.

� Batch Program:Documents being sent to a common destination are stored intomemory all during the day. At a programmed time, all thedocuments are then transmitted to the desired destination.

� Polling Reception Program:The time to perform a polling reception can be registered.

Confirmation of the Registered Details:

A Program key list can be printed to confirm the registered data. Refer toSection 1.4 Printing the FAX Program List in Chapter 7 Reports and Lists onpage 7-6.

Before Starting Operations:� Up to 30 program keys can be registered. However, there cannot be more than 540

facsimile and one-touch keys in total.

� The name of the program key can be up to 12 characters.

� Destinations must be pre-registered as one-touch before they can be registered in aprogram key. Refer to Section 2.12 Registering One-Touch Keys on page 3-30.

Page 248: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 42 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Registering the Transmission Program

1. Press <Utility>.

2. Select [User Set], then touch [FAX Input].

3. Touch [FAX Program].

4. Select the One-Touch key to be registered.

� The initial screen for the Index is automatically displayed. Touch [�] [�], [Index List], or the tab for the index to search for the desired One-Touch key.

5. Enter the program name to be displayed on the FAX Program key, then touch [Next].

� Refer to Section 1.8 Entering Characters for Registration on page 3-5.

Page 249: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 43

6. Select [TX] and touch [Next].

7. Select the destination.

� Using a One-Touch key:Touch [One-Touch], touch the one-touch key for the destination, and touch[Enter].

� Using Name Search:Touch [Search] and select thedestination, then touch [Enter].

� Using Serial Broadcast Transmission:Select all destinations to be sent.

� When the destination is not registered:Touch [No dest.].

8. Touch [Next].

9. Touch [Transmission Setting].

Registering the Transmission Program (Continued)

Page 250: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 44 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

10. Select the functions to be registered. Touch [Enter] when finished.

� To select:The Image Quality, Reduction,Contrast, and Scan Area can beselected on the [Quality] screen. Whenthe [FAX Menu] is touched, thefollowing functions can be selected.

• Real-Time Transmission

• Transmission Report

• Priority Transmission

• Remote Copying

• Timer Transmission

• Password Transmission

• TSI

• 2in1 Transmission

• Destination Insert

• 2-Sided Transmission

• Rotation Transmission

• TX Marker (option)

� Timer and Real-Time Transmission cannot be selected concurrently. If two or more destinations are selected and the Real-Time Transmission is also used, the Real-Time Transmission setting is reset. When 2in1 Transmission is selected, [Auto Size] is selected as the zoom ratio.

11. Confirm the details that have been registered in the program key. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

� To modify:Select the item to modify and re-register it.

Registering the Transmission Program (Continued)

Page 251: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 45

12. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the standby screen returns.

� To consecutively register Repeat the steps from step 4.

Register the Batch Program

1. Perform the same steps as in steps 1~5 under Registering the Transmission Program.

� Refer to Registering the Transmission Program on page 3-42.

2. Select [Batch], then touch [Next].

3. Select the destination.

� Using a One-Touch key:Touch the [One-Touch] key, touch theOne-Touch key for the destination, thentouch [Enter].

� Using Search:Touch [Search] to select the destinationby spelling. Touch [Enter] afterselecting the destination.

4. Touch [Next].

Registering the Transmission Program (Continued)

Page 252: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 46 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

5. Set the time and interval for transmission.

Setting the Hour:

1. Touch [Hour]. 2. Enter the digits using

the 10-key Pad.

� Numbers ranging from 0~23 may be entered.

Setting the Minutes:

1. Touch [Minute].2. Enter the digits using

the 10-key Pad.

� Numbers ranging from 00~59 may be entered.

Setting the Transmission Interval:

1. Touch [Every Hours].2. Enter the digits using

the 10-key Pad.

� Set the length of time for the transmission interval (01~24 hours).

6. Touch [Next].

Register the Batch Program (Continued)

Page 253: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 47

7. Touch [Transmission Setting].

8. Select functions to be registered. Touch [Enter] after selecting all of them.

� To select:The Image Quality, Reduction,Contrast, and Scan Area can beselected on the [Quality] screen. When[Menu 1] is touched, the followingfunctions can be selected.

• TSI

• 2in1 Transmission

• Destination Insert

• 2-Sided Transmission

• Transmission Report

• Password Transmission

• Rotation Transmission

• TX Marker (option)

� When 2in1 Transmission is selected, [Auto-Size] is selected and the zoom ration.

9. Confirm the details that have been registered in the program key. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

� To modify:Select the item to be modified, and re-register it.

10. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Register the Batch Program (Continued)

Page 254: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 48 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Registering the Polling Reception Program

1. Perform the same steps as those of 1~5 under Registering the Transmission Program.

� Refer to Registering the Transmission Program on page 3-42.

2. Select [Polling RX], then touch [Next].

3. Select the destination.

� Using a One-Touch key:Touch the [One-Touch] key, touch theOne-Touch key for the destination, thentouch [Enter].

� Using Search:Touch [Search] to select the destinationby spelling. Touch [Enter] afterselecting the destination.

4. Touch [Next].

5. Touch [Timer Set].

6. Selecting the time for starting Polling Reception:

Page 255: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 3 - 49

Setting the Hour:

1. Touch [Hour].2. Enter the digits using

the 10-key Pad.

� Numbers ranging from 0~23 may be entered.

Setting the Minutes:

1. Touch [Minute].2. Enter the digits using

the 10-key Pad.

� Numbers ranging from 00~59 may be entered.

When the Time is not desired:

1. Touch [Timer OFF].

7. Touch [Enter].

8. Confirm the details that have been registered in the program key. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

� To modify:Select the item to be modified, and re-register it.

9. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Modifying and Deleting Data

1. Perform the same steps as those of 1 to 3 under Registering the Transmission Program.

� Refer to Registering the Transmission Program on page 3-42.

Registering the Polling Reception Program (Continued)

Page 256: IT3520_2520 User Manual

3 - 50 Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Touch the facsimile program key to be modified.

3. Touch the key for the item to be modified, and modify the registered details.

� All registered details are cleared when the program type is modified.

Transmission Program:

� To modify:Select the key for the item to be modifiedfrom the choices in the display.

� To delete:Confirm the registered details, and touch[Delete] to erase the information.

Batch Program:

� To modify:Select the key for the item to be modifiedfrom the choices in the display.

� To delete:Confirm the registered details, and touch[Delete] to erase the information.

Polling Reception Program:

� To modify:Select the key for the item to be modifiedfrom the choices in the display.

� To delete:Confirm the registered details, and touch[Delete] to erase the information.

4. Confirm the registered details. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

� To modify:Select the item to be modified, and re-register it.

5. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Modifying and Deleting Data (Continued)

Page 257: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 1

Chapter 4 Advanced

Registration and

Setting Operations

SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

This chapter describes the advanced registration items, and the setting of advancedfeatures of the NEC IT 3520/IT2520.

SECTION 2 ADVANCED SETTINGS

2.1 Changing the Initial Settings

Initial settings when carrying out panel reset while the NEC IT3520/IT2520 isturned ON can be changed into a use situation. When the NEC IT 3520/IT2520 is turned ON, or when panel reset is carried out, it becomesunnecessary to set up a copy and a fax function again, if it sets up accordingto the situation used most often.

The following items can be set according to the user’s choice:

� Memory Recall:

Sets whether the Memory Recall function is used. The factory defaultsetting is OFF.

� Mixed Original Detection:

Sets whether the Mixed Original Detection mode is set as the default.The factory default is OFF.

� Language Selected for LCD:

Can be set to display either English, Japanese, French, or Spanish. Thefactory default setting is English.

� Original � Copy Default:

Sets the default for Orig � Copy. The factory default setting is1-Sided � 1-Sided.

Page 258: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 2 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� Auto Paper/Auto Size:

Selects the default from Auto Paper, Auto Size, or Manual. The factorydefault setting is Auto Paper.

� Drawer Priority:

Sets the default value for paper selection. The factory default setting isTop Cassette.

� Special Paper:

Sets the paper type for each paper feeding point (including a cassette).The factory default setting is Normal Paper.

� Multiple-in-1 and Booklet Copy Zoom:

Sets whether or not to use the automatic zoom ratio when performing2in1 or 4in1 copying. The automatic zoom ratio factory default setting isON.

� Energy Save Mode:

Sets the length of time before the unit automatically switches into thepower saving mode when no activity has occurred. The factory setting is5 minutes.

� Sleep Mode Setting:

If there is no activity for a certain amount of time, the machine will enterinto Sleep Mode. The waiting time can be set by the user. The factorysetting is 30 minutes. The amount of power saved is greater than theEnergy Save Mode; however, it takes longer to print. Touching any keyon the operation panel ’wakes up’ the machine. When powering up, thepanel shows "Under Processing" for a short time, and then startsworking. (Loading a document during the Sleep Mode does not wake upthe unit). The Sleep Mode can be disabled by changing the softwareswitch. Refer to Setting of the Time for Auto Power Source Off (Mode406) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations onpage 4-77.

� LCD Back-light Off:

If there is no activity within a certain amount of time, the unit will turn offthe Touch Panel backlight element. The length of time the unit waits toturn off the backlight can be set. The factory setting 1 minute.

Page 259: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 3

� Auto Panel Reset:

If there is no activity within a certain period of time while registering,setting, or selecting data, the Touch Panel display returns to the stand-byscreen. This length of time can be set by the user. The factory setting is1 minute.

� Plug-in Counter, ID Key Reset:

Sets whether to reset each function when the user changes. The factorydefault setting is ON.

� 4 in 1 Copy Order:

Set the page order for the 4 in 1 copying. The factory default is:

� Density Priority:

Sets whether to use automatic or manual as the default density setting.The factory default settings are Auto (for density) and Text (for image).

� Default Copy Output Levels:

Sets the default density value. The factory default setting is Normal.

� Printing Density:

Sets the print exposure level to lighten or darken the printed output. Thefactory default setting is 0.

� Output Priority

Sets the default for sorting. The factory default setting is Non-sort.

� Intelligent Sorting

Sets whether the unit enables the intelligent sorting function according tothe number of pages in the original document. The factory default settingis ON.

Page 260: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� Output Tray (option):

Sets bin (the paper exit area) allocation for each copying or facsimilefunction. The factory default setting is as follows:

• When the Job Separator is installed -

• When the Finisher is installed -

� "Small" Originals:

Sets whether a document can be copied if it is too small to be detectedwhen the automatic paper selection is used. The factory default is ON.

� Scanner Dry:

Sets the time for the automatic Scanner Dry. No Scanner Dry time is setin the factory default.

� Crease/Center Staple (option)

Sets the place of the crease and staple when the Booklet Creationfeature is selected. The factory default is 0.

� Priority Screen:

Sets the initial display for the stand-by screen. The factory default settingis Auto-mode screen.

� Priority Facsimile Screen:

Sets the initial value for the destination specification screen when usingthe facsimile function. The factory default is One-Touch screen.

1st Tray - FAX, Port 1, Port 2

2nd Tray - Printer, Copier

1st Tray - FAX, Port 1, Port 2

2nd Tray - Printer, Copier

User’s Choice Settings

1. Press [Utility].

Page 261: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 5

2. Touch [User Set].

3. Touch [User’s Choice].

4. Setting for Memory Recall:

1. Select [1/6], and then touch [Memory Recall].

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] to set the default value, then touch [Enter].

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 262: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 6 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

5. Setting for Mixed Original Detection:

1. Select [1/6], and touch [Mixed Original Detection].

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] to set the Mixed Original Detection default setting, then touch [Enter].

6. Setting for Display Language:

1. Select [1/6], then touch [Language Selected for LCD].

2. Select the Language desired, then touch [Enter].

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 263: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 7

7. Setting for Original� Copy Default:

1. Select [2/6], then touch [Original �Copy Default].

2. Select the document and copying method to be set as the default value, then touch [Enter].

� Refer to Section 2.6 Selecting the Document and Copy Format (Orig.�Copy Screen) in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-39

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 264: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 8 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

8. Setting for the Auto Paper/Auto Size Priority:

1. Select [2/6], then touch [Auto Paper/Auto Size].

2. Select [Auto Paper], [Auto Size], or [Manual] to set the default value, then touch [Enter].

� Refer to Section 1.4 Selecting the Copy Paper Size for Copying in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-7, and Section 1.6 Selecting the Zoom Ratio for Copying in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-14.

9. Setting for Drawer Priority:

1. Select [2/6] then touch [Drawer Priority].

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 265: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 9

2. Select the paper cassette for the paper to be set as the default paper, then touch [Enter].

10. Setting for Special Paper:

1. Select [2/6], then Touch [Special Paper].

2. Select the key for the paper cassette containing special paper, then select the special paper type. Finally, touch [Enter].

� If [Recycled] or [Special] is set, it is not used for facsimile reception.

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 266: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 10 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

11. Setting for Multiple-in-1 and Booklet Copy Zoom:

1. Select [2/6], then touch [Multiple-in-1 and Booklet Copy Zoom].

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] to select the scaling factor best suited for the document and the copy paper size, then touch [Enter].

� Refer to Section 2.6 Selecting the Document and Copy Format (Orig.�Copy Screen) in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-39.

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 267: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 11

12. Setting for Energy Save Mode:

1. Select [3/6], then touch [Energy Save Mode].

2. Enter digits using the 10-key Pad , then touch [Enter].

� Setting the timer for the Energy Save Mode:Times ranging from 1~240minutes can be set.

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 268: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 12 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

13. Setting for Sleep Mode Settings:

1. Select [3/6], then touch [Sleep Mode Setting].

2. Enter digits using the 10-key Pad, then touch [Enter].

� Setting the timer for the Sleep Mode Settings:Times ranging from 1~240minutes can be set.

� Refer to Setting of the Time for Auto Power Source Off (Mode 406) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-77.

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 269: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 13

14. Setting for the LCD Backlight OFF Function:

1. Select [3/6], then touch [LCD Back-light OFF].

2. Enter digits using the 10-key Pad, then touch [Enter].

� To change the setting:Press <C> (clear key) and re-enter.

Times ranging from 1~240minutes can be set.

� If the settings for the Energy Save Mode and Sleep Mode Setting are shorter than the LCD Back-light OFF function, it turns off immediately.

15. Setting Auto Panel Reset:

1. Select [3/6], then touch [Auto Panel Reset].

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 270: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 14 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Set the length of time before Auto Panel Reset is activated, then touch [Enter].

� To select:When setting the time from 1to 240 minutes, use the 10-key Pad to enter digits. When[30 seconds] is touched, thereset time is set to 30seconds.

� If a timer is not needed:Touch [No Reset].

� To change the setting:Press <C> (clear key) andre-enter.

16. Setting for Plug-In Counter, ID key Reset:

1. Select [3/6], then touch [Plug-In Counter, ID key Reset].

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] to set the default value to automatically clear defaults when a user is changed, then touch [Enter].

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 271: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 15

17. Setting for 4in1 Copy Order:

1. Select [4/6], then touch [4in1 Copy Order].

2. Select the default page order for 4in1 copying, then touch [Enter].

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 272: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 16 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

18. Setting for Density Priority:

1. Select [4/6] and touch [Density Priority].

2. Select the density setting method and image quality to be set as the default value, then touch [Enter].

� Refer to 1.12 Adjusting the Density for Copying in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-20, and Section 1.15 Copying Figures and Photos in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-23.

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 273: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 17

19. Setting for Default Copy Output Levels:

1. Select [4/6], then touch [Default Copy Output Levels].

2. Select the default density level for the automatic setting and the manual setting, then touch [Enter].

� Refer to Section 1.12 Adjusting the Density for Copying in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-20.

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 274: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 18 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

20. Setting for Printing Density:

1. Select [4/6], then touch [Printing Density].

2. Select the density for printing, then touch [Enter].

21. Setting for the Output Priority:

1. Select [4/6], then touch [Output Priority].

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 275: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 19

2. Select the default sorting method, then touch [Enter].

22. Setting for Intelligent Sorting:

1. Select [5/6], then touch [Intelligent Sorting].

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] to set the default value, then touch [Enter].

� Refer to Sorting Procedure in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-26.

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 276: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 20 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

23. Setting for Output Tray:

1. Select [5/6] then touch [Output Tray].

2. Select respective output trays for facsimile, copy, and PC print sheets, then touch [Enter].

� The [Output Tray] key is displayed only when the optional Job Separator or a Finisher is installed.

� Printer sets which output bin is used when the PC printer function is used.

� Port sorting is available only when the 2nd G3 port option is installed.

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 277: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 21

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 278: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 22 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

24. Setting for Small Original:

1. Select [5/6], then touch ["Small" Originals].

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] to detect small documents, then touch [Enter].

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 279: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 23

25. Setting for Scanner Dry:

1. Select [5/6], then touch [Scanner Dry].

2. Enter digits using the 10-key pad, then touch [Enter].

� To select:Touch [Hours] or [Minute]and enter digits.

� To change the settings:Press <C> (Clear key) andre-enter.

26. Setting for Crease/Center:

1. Select [5/6], then touch [Crease/Center Staple].

� The [Crease/Center Staple] key is displayed only when the optional Finisher and Saddle Unit are installed.

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 280: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 24 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Touch [Crease] or [Center Staple]. Touch [�] [�] to adjust the setting, and then touch [Enter].

27. Setting for Priority Screen:

1. Select [6/6], then touch [Priority Screen].

2. Touch the [Default Device Priority].

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 281: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 25

3. Select the key for the screen to be displayed first, then touch [Enter].

� To select:[FAX]:

Touch this to display the FAXscreen as priority.

[Auto]:

Touch this to display theAuto-mode screen as priority.

[Copy]:

Touch this to display thisscreen as the priority.

The selected key is displayedin reverse to show it isactivated.

� Switching the screen:To switch the default devicePriority screen from [Auto] to[Copy] or [FAX], after setting,press the <Access> key andthen press the <Panel Reset>key.

28. Setting for Priority FAX Screen:

1. Select [6/6], then [Priority Screen], and then touch [Priority FAX Screen].

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 282: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 26 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.2 Transmission Settings

This section describes instructions for setting the transmission functionsto be carried out by the administrator.

The following items can be set:

� Priority Quality:

Sets the default value for the Image Quality setting. The factory default isStandard.

� Priority Contrast:

Sets the default value for the Contrast setting. The factory default isNormal.

2. Select the key for the screen to be displayed as the initial FAX screen, then touch [Enter].

� To select:[One-Touch]:

Touch this to make this theinitial screen displayed.

[Search]:

Touch this to make this theinitial screen displayed.

[10-key Dialing]:

Touch this to make this theinitial screen displayed.

[Index]:

Touch this to make this theinitial screen displayed.

The selected key is displayedin reverse.

� Switching the screen priority:The screen will be switchedafter resetting the userselection or the automaticclearing, or after pressing<Panel Reset>.

29. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

User’s Choice Settings (Continued)

Page 283: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 27

� Communication mode (when the 2nd G3 Port option is used):

Sets the default value for which of the two G3 facsimile lines is tried first.The factory setting is set to try Port 1 first.

� Initial Status of the Transmission Mode (TX):

Sets either Memory Transmission or Real-Time Transmission as thedefault setting. The factory setting is Memory Transmission mode.

� TSI Position

Sets the style of the TSI information to be printed on the transmitteddocument. The factory setting is On the Doc.

� TSI Selection

If multiple Transmitter Subscriber’s Identification (TSI) is registered, youmay set the default TSI to go back to after operation. The default settingis [1] and the TSI is registered for [1].

� Rotation TX

You may set whether to do Rotation TX or not after an operation. Thedefault setting is [ON].

� 2-Sided TX

You may set the margin layout for the 2-sided transmission. The defaultsetting is [Auto].

The TSI is required on all facsimile transmissions. It isillegal to turn off this feature.

Page 284: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 28 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Transmission Settings

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen, and then touch [TX Settings].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2. Quality Mode Menu selections:

1. Select [Quality/Mode], then touch [Priority Quality].

Page 285: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 29

2. Select the key for the Image Quality to be set as the initial (default) value, then touch [Enter].

� Refer to Section 1.15 Copying Figures and Photos in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-23.

3. Touch [Priority Contrast].

4. Select the contrast setting for the default value, then touch [Enter].

Transmission Settings (Continued)

Page 286: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 30 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

5. Touch [Communication Mode].

6. Select the G3 Port to be used as the default port.

� [Com. Mode] is displayed only when the optional 2nd G3 Port is installed.

3. Communication Menu selections:

1. Select [Com. Menu], then touch [TX].

Transmission Settings (Continued)

Page 287: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 31

2. Select the key for the transmission mode to be set as the default value, then touch [Enter].

3. Touch [TSI].

4. Touch [TSI Position].

Transmission Settings (Continued)

Page 288: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 32 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

5. Select the key for the default position of the TSI on the document, then touch [Enter].

6. Touch [TSI Selection].

7. Select the TSI you want to select as default, then touch [Enter] until the display returns to the Communication Menu screen.

Transmission Settings (Continued)

The TSI is required on all facsimile transmissions. It is illegal to turn off this feature.

Page 289: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 33

8. Touch [Rotation TX].

9. Select [ON] or [OFF] as default, then touch [Enter]

10. Touch [2-Sided TX].

Transmission Settings (Continued)

Page 290: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 34 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

11. Select the margin layout you want to set as default.

12. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Transmission Settings (Continued)

Page 291: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 35

2.3 Setting the Reception Functions

This section describes reception functions that are performed by theadministrator.

Reception Functions:

� Reception Mode:

Sets the reception mode of the NEC IT 3520/IT2520. The factory defaultis Automatic Reception.

� Number of Rings:

Sets the number of times the unit’s telephone rings before the automaticreception function begins. The factory default is 1 ring.

Reception Settings

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen, and touch [FAX Setting].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2. Touch [RX Functions].

Page 292: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 36 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3. Setting the reception functions:

1. Touch [Reception Mode].

2. Select the reception mode to be set as the initial value, then touch [Enter].

� To select:[Auto] - Touch this to set theAutomatic Reception mode.

[Manual] - Touch this to set theManual Reception mode.

4. Set the number of rings before Automatic Reception takes place:

1. Touch [No.of RX Call Rings].

2. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the number of times the telephone is to ring before activating the Automatic Reception function, then touch [Enter].

� Selections are 1~ 20 rings.

Reception Settings (Continued)

Page 293: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 37

2.4 Setting the Memory Lock for the Received FAX

Lock the printout of the received facsimile to printout collectively. By setting upthe hours for Memory Lock, and the password-controlling printing operation,you may receive incoming faxes during the late evening in safety and security.

Before Starting Operations:� Only received fax documents can be memory locked.

� Copy/PC printouts cannot be locked.

� If you set memory lock hours, when the time comes for releasing the memory, saveddocuments are automatically printed.

� If you want to manually print, select [Print Management] on the [User Management]screen, and print.

� If you want to password-control the unlocking operation, register [Memory LockPassword].

� If the Memory Lock Password is not yet registered, the printing operation may beginwithout giving password input.

5. Confirm the setting details when the screen returns to that shown in step 3. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

� To modify:Touch the key for the items to bemodified to change the setting.

6. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Reception Settings (Continued)

Page 294: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 38 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting the Collective Printing for the Received FAX

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen and touch [RX Settings]. Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2. Touch [Memory Lock].

3. Select the item to modify.

Page 295: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 39

Setting the Memory Lock for the Received FAX

Setting the Memory Lock Hours:

1. Touch [Memory Lock On/Off].]

2. Select the day of the week to set memory lock hours.

3. Touch [Stop Time], then use the 10-key Pad to input the time when you want to start printing.

Page 296: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 40 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

4. Touch [Start Time], then use the 10-key Pad to input the time when you want to stop printing.

� Before you set the time, make sure to first set the day of the week.

� The time you select to start/stop printing will be common for all days of the week selected. You may not select a different time for different days of the week.

� You may not set the same time for the Start and Stop printing operation.

� Touch [Cancel] to cancel setting.

� When Memory Lock is set, this icon will be displayed.

Setting the Memory Lock for the Received FAX (Continued)

Page 297: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 41

Setting the Memory Lock Password

1. Touch [Memory Lock Password].

2. Use the 10-key Pad to input the Memory Lock Password (four digits), then touch [Enter].

� To re-enter:Touch <Clear> to clear the datafield, and re-enter the information.

Touch [Cancel] to go back to thestate before registering anyinformation.

3. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

� To modify:Touch the key to modify and re-enter.

Page 298: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 42 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Start the Printing Manually

1. Press <Utility>.

2. Touch [User Management].

3. Touch [Print Management].

4. Use the 10-key Pad to input the Memory Lock Password (four digits), then touch [OK].

� This screen will not be displayed when the Memory Lock Password is not input.

Page 299: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 43

2.5 Setting for Received Documents

This function is used to set how the operator wants a document to be handled afterreception.

Set how to process the received fax documents. Received documents are classifiedby F-CODE TX, Ports and Public Document. Under these categories, you may sethow to process each received documents.

Type of documents:

F-CODE: Sets how to process the document for each F-CODE. When an F-Codeddocument is received, it will be processed according to the pre-set methodof reception set for each F-CODE.

Port: Sets how to process documents for each port.

Public document: Sets how to process the document without F-CODE.

Methods of Handling a Document after Reception:

� Print: Prints the document as soon as it is received.

� Forward: Forwards the received document to other facsimiles.

� Print & Forward: Prints the document and also forwards it to other facsimiles.

5. Select [Lock Off], then touch [Enter].

� To stop printing:Touch [Lock On] while printing,then touch [Enter]. After thedocument is printed, the lockfeature is enabled.

� To restart printing, then go back to Memory Lock on:Touch [Temp. Print], then it willprint the document in memory (atthat time) and go back to MemoryLock on.

6. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

� To modify:Touch the key to modify and re-enter.

Start the Printing Manually (Continued)

Page 300: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 44 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� Save to Box: Saves the received document into a box, that has been registered in advance foreach user, without printing it.

Before Starting Operations:� The factory default setting is to print the document as soon as it is received.

� When the unit receives a remote copy facsimile, it prints a received documentirrespective of the current setting.

Settings for Received Documents

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen and touch [Doc Manage].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2. Touch [Public document].

3. Touch [RX Doc. Settings].

Page 301: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 45

4. Select the document management method.

� To select:Select the desired method ofhandling a received document.

The selection is displayed in reverse.

To print the received documentimmediately (factory default):

1. Touch [Print], and touch [Enter].

To forward the receiveddocument to other facsimiles:

1. Touch [Forward].

2. Select the destinations and touch [Enter].

� To select:Touch [Add Dest.] and selectthe destination. When [Detail] istouched, details about thedestination are displayed.

� To modify:Touch the key for thedestination and touch [Delete].

Settings for Received Documents (Continued)

Page 302: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 46 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

To print the receiveddocument and forward it toanother facsimiles:

1. Touch [Prt&Forward].

2. Select the destinations and touch [Enter].

� To select:Touch [Add Dest.] and selectthe destination. When [Detail]is touched, details aboutdestination are displayed.

� To modify:Select the key for thedestination and touch [Delete].

To save the receiveddocument in a box:

1. Touch [Save to Box], then touch [Enter].

� Printing the document:Search document on the [Print]menu on the [Job List] screen,select it and then print.

5. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

� To modify:Touch the key for the items to bemodified to change the setting.

Settings for Received Documents (Continued)

Page 303: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 47

Setting for Handling the Received Document by F-CODE

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen and touch [Doc Manage].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2. Touch [F-CODE].

3. Select the key to register.

4. Touch [F-CODE].

� To cancel:Touch [Delete].

Page 304: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 48 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

5. Select the way of setting the F-CODE.

Registration of the F-CODE:

1. Touch [F-CODE].

2. Enter the F-CODE, then touch [Enter].

� Refer to Section 1.7 Required Initial Registration/Settings and Confirmation in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-4.

� To re-enter the number:Use [�] or [�] to move thecursor and re-enter thenumber, or press <C> tore-enter it.

Touch [Delete] to erase acharacter on the cursor.

Touch [Cancel] to cancel theprocedure.

Setting for Handling the Received Document by F-CODE (Continued)

Page 305: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 49

Registration of the F-CODE Password:

1. Touch [F-CODE Password].

2. Enter the F-CODE password, then touch [Enter].

� To re-enter the number:Use [�] or [�] to move thecursor and re-enter thenumber, or press <C> to re-enter it.

Touch [Delete] to erase acharacter on the cursor.

Touch [Cancel] to cancel theprocedure.

Registration of the Remote Input Check:

1. Touch [Remote Input Check].

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] for the remote input check, then touch [Enter].

3. Touch [Enter] again.

Page 306: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 50 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

6. Touch [RX Doc. Settings]. .

7. Select the way of handling the received document.

To print the received documentimmediately (factory default):

1. Touch [Print], and touch [Enter].

To forward the receiveddocument to another facsimiles:

1. Touch [Forward].

2. Select the destinations and touch [Enter].

� To select:Touch [Add Dest.] and selectthe destination. When [Detail] istouched, details about thedestination are displayed.

� To modify:Touch the key for thedestination and touch [Delete].

Page 307: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 51

To print the receiveddocument and forward it toanother facsimiles:

1. Touch [Prt&Forward].

2. Select the destinations and touch [Enter].

� To select:Touch [Add Dest.] and selectthe destination. When [Detail]is touched, details aboutdestination are displayed.

� To modify:Select the key for thedestination and touch [Delete].

8. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

� To modify:Touch the key for the items to bemodified to change the setting.

Setting for Handling the Received Document by Port

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen and touch [Doc. Manage].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

(Continued)

Page 308: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 52 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Touch [Port].

3. Select the port.

4. Touch [RX Doc. Settings].

� To use the port:Touch [YES].

� To not use the port:Touch [NO].

� The items in the Port screen (such as Port, RX Doc. Settings, Forwarding Destination) are able to be set when [YES] is selected in the Port screen.

5. Select the way of handling the received document.

Setting for Handling the Received Document by Port (Continued)

Page 309: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 53

To print the received documentimmediately (factory default):

1. Touch [Print], and touch [Enter].

To forward the receiveddocument to another facsimiles:

1. Touch [Forward].

2. Select the destinations and touch [Enter].

� To select:Touch [Add Dest.] and selectthe destination. When [Detail] istouched, details about thedestination are displayed.

� To modify:Touch the key for thedestination and touch [Delete].

To print the receiveddocument and forward it toanother facsimiles:

1. Touch [Prt&Forward].

2. Select the destinations and touch [Enter].

� To select:Touch [Add Dest.] and selectthe destination. When [Detail]is touched, details aboutdestination are displayed.

� To modify:Select the key for thedestination and touch [Delete].

6. Touch [Enter] repeatedly until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

� To modify:Touch the key for the items to bemodified to change the setting.

Page 310: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 54 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.6 Report Print Settings

This section describes the various settings needed for printing reports.

Report Settings

� Transmission Report:

Sets the report giving details concerning facsimile transmission results.The factory default setting is If TX Fail (Prints a report if the transmissionwas unsuccessful).

� Activity Report:

Set whether an activity report is automatically printed after every 50communication transmissions. The factory default setting is ON.

Report Setting

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen, then touch [Report Settings].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2. Setting functions for printing a report:

1. Touch [TX Report].

Page 311: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 55

2. Select the method of printing the activity report, then touch [Enter].

� To select:You may set two types ofreports, either the singledestination, or the Multipledestination.

[ON] - Touch this toautomatically print atransmission report for everytransmission.

[If TX Fail] - Touch this toautomatically print atransmission report only whenthe transmission could not besent.

[OFF] - Touch this to turn offthe automatic activity reportprinting.

3. Setting for the Activity Report:

1. Touch [Activity Report].

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] for automatic printing, then touch [Enter].

4. Confirm the setting details when the screen returns to that shown in step 2. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

� To modify:Touch the key for the items to bemodified to change the setting.

5. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Report Setting (Continued)

Page 312: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 56 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.7 Confirming the Usage Status of Each Account

A per-account status can be displayed concerning the number of pagesprinted and transmitted. Accounts can only be displayed when the accountshave been registered.

Confirming Account Status

1. Select [Admin 1.] on the Administrator Management screen and touch [Account Counter].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2. Select the account.

� To select:Touch the key for the user or touch[Account #] and enter the desireduser number.

� When [All Clear] is touched, all accumulated user data is cleared.

3. Confirm the accumulated data and touch [Enter].

4. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Page 313: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 57

2.8 Confirming and Modifying the Page Counters

The meter count of the accumulated number of pages received, copied, orreports printed can be confirmed and modified by the authority of theadministrator.

Counter

� Total:

The total number of pages printed, since the NEC IT 3520/IT2520 wasinstalled, can be confirmed.

� Copy Total:

The total number of copy pages of printed can be confirmed.

� Copy Size:

The total number of pages printed in the specified paper size set for thesize counter can be confirmed. (The installation technician will set thespecified paper size.)

� Copy 2-Sided:

The total number of 2-sided pages printed can be confirmed.

� Printer Total:

The total number of pages of printed by the PC can be confirmed.

� Printer Size:

The total number of pages printed by the PC in the specified paper sizeset in the size counter can be confirmed. (The installation technician willset the specified paper size.)

� Printer 2-Sided:

The total number of 2-sided pages printed can be confirmed.

� Scan:

The total number of original pages read by the scanner can beconfirmed.

� Account Total:

The total number of pages printed per registered account (only displayedwhen the accounts are registered, and the Account Management modeis active) can be confirmed.

Page 314: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 58 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� FAX Print

The total number of received facsimile pages printed can be confirmedand modified.

� Copy Print:

The total number of copies printed can be confirmed and modified.

� Report Print:

The total number of reports printed can be confirmed and modified.

� FAX TX:

The total number of pages transmitted by facsimile can be confirmedand modified.

Confirming and Modifying the Page Counters

1. Select [Admin 1.] on the Administrator Management screen and touch [Counter].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2. Touch [Counter] or [Device].

Page 315: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 59

3. Select the item to modify.

� Items in the [Counter] screen cannot be modified.

4. Use the 10-key Pad to enter a modified count figure, then touch [Enter].

� To re-enter the number:Use [ � ] or [ � ] to move the cursorand re-enter the number, or press <C>(clear key) to re-enter it.

When [Cancel] is touched, it returns tothe initial status.

5. Confirm the registered details when the display returns to the illustrated screen.

� To modify:Touch the key of the item to bemodified, and re-register.

Confirming and Modifying the Page Counters

Page 316: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 60 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.9 Software Switch Settings

The NEC IT 3520/IT2520 is already set to various functions as default. Bymanipulating software switches, you may activate these functions to suit yourneeds.

Software Switch Settings

Mode Selection: Set the category of software switch settings in three digits.

Bit Selection: Each mode is defined with a combination of eight binary bits(0~7), each having a pair of alternatively selectable values "0" and "1". Eachbit value presents a function status.

HEX Selection: Set the function status for each mode in hexadecimal number(0~9, A~F). For example, when the bit is set to "00110000", the HEX settingwill be "30".

The example of Bit Selection (binary number) and HEX Selection(hexadecimal number) is shown in the following table.

6. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Confirming and Modifying the Page Counters

Page 317: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 61

Decimal NumberBit Selection

(Binary Number)HEX Selection

(Hexadecimal Number)

0 00000000 00

1 00000001 01

2 00000010 02

3 00000011 03

4 00000100 04

5 00000101 05

6 00000110 06

7 00000111 07

8 00001000 08

9 00001001 09

10 00001010 0A

11 00001011 0B

12 00001100 0C

13 00001101 0D

14 00001110 0E

15 00001111 0F

16 00010000 10

17 00010001 11

18 00010010 12

19 00010011 13

20 00010100 14

252 11111100 FC

253 11111101 FD

254 11111110 FE

255 11111111 FF

....

....

....

Page 318: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 62 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting the Software Switch

1. Select [Admin. 2] on the Administrator Management screen and touch [Soft SW Set].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2. Touch [Mode Selection], then use the 10-Key Pad to enter the mode number.

3. Set the function by [Bit Selection] or [HEX Selection].

� Setting by [Bit Selection]:

1. Touch [Bit Selection], then by [ � ] or [ � ], place the cursor on the bit you want to change.

2. Enter the [0] or [1] by the 10-Key Pad, then touch [Enter].

Page 319: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 63

� Setting by [HEX Selection]:

1. Touch [HEX Selection].

2. Enter the [HEX] by the 10-Key Pad and [A] to [F], then touch [Enter]

4. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Setting the Software Switch

Page 320: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 64 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting the Transmission Marker and Password Check (Mode 000)

Factory Setting

Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Value 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 30)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses

In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.

Bit No.AssociatedFunctions

Bit Value

SelectableStatuses

Ref. Page

7 To have selected default to print or not to print the transmission marker.

0 Not to print.6-17

1 To print.

6 To specify print position of the transmission marker.

0 To print at both upper and lower ends of each document page.

6-171 To print at the lower

end of each document page.

5, 4 __________ 11 Do not modify this bit. _____

3 To have selected default to check or not to check the communication password before transmission.

0 Not to check.

6-201 To check.

2 To have selected default to check or not to check the communication password before reception.

0 Not to check.

6-321 To check.

1, 0 __________ 00 Do not modify this bit. _____

In mode 000, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status ofthis facsimile with respect to a transmission marker and communication password.

Page 321: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 65

Setting the Document Destination Insert (Mode 001)

Factory Setting

Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Value 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 (HEX: 14)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses

In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.

Bit No.AssociatedFunctions

Bit Value

SelectableStatuses

Ref. Page

7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1

__________ 0001010

Do not modify this bit. _____

0 Select to insert or not to insert the destination to the sending document.

0 Not to insert.6-6

1 To insert.

In mode 001, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status ofthis facsimile with respect to destination insert.

Page 322: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 66 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting the Memory Clear Report and TX Report for Serial Broadcast (Mode 002)

Factory Setting

Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Value 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 (HEX: A8)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses

In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.

Bit No.AssociatedFunctions

Bit Value

SelectableStatuses

Ref. Page

7, 6, 5, 4 __________ 1010 Do not modify this bit. _____

3 To make a selection to print or not to print the memory clear report.

0 Not to print out.8-26

1 To print out.

2 When broadcasting, to print all TX Reports on one sheet, or to print each TX Report on separate sheets.

0 All TX Reports on one sheet.

7-11 Each TX Report on

separate sheets.

1, 0 __________ 00 Do not modify this bit. _____

In mode 002, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status ofthis facsimile with respect to memory clear report and TX report for serial broadcast.

Page 323: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 67

Setting of Length of Time to Hold Data after Incomplete Transmission (Mode 004)

Factory Setting

Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Value 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 (HEX: 16)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses

In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.

Bit No.AssociatedFunctions

Bit Value

SelectableStatuses

Ref. Page

7, 6, 5, 4 __________ 0001 Do not modify this bit. _____

3, 2, 1, 0 To set the length of time to hold data in memory after incomplete transmission.

0000 In this setting, [RE-TX START] key will not be displayed.

1-49

0001 To set data hold time to 10 minutes.

0010 To set data hold time to 20 minutes.

0011 To set data hold time to 30 minutes.

0100 To set data hold time to 40 minutes.

0101 To set data hold time to 50 minutes.

0110 To set data hold time to 60 minutes.

0111 To set data hold time to 120 minutes.

1000 To set data hold time to 240 minutes.

1001 To set data hold time to 480 minutes.

Others Do not use any other combination of bit values.

In mode 004, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status ofthis facsimile with respect to the length of time to hold data after incompletetransmission.

Page 324: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 68 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting Connection onto Common Telephone Line (Mode 006)

Factory Setting

Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Value 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 (HEX: 32)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses

In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.

Bit No.AssociatedFunctions

Bit Value

SelectableStatuses

Ref. Page

7, 6, 5,4, 3, 2

__________ 001100

Do not modify this bit. _____

1 Select the PSTN port automatically. Specify how to dial standard telephone lines. (Valid only for the products using the optional 2nd G3 port.)

0 Based on the type of operation/registration, call from the designated line under ports 1 and 2.

5-51 Regardless of the

type of operation/registration, call from the available line under ports 1 and 2.

0 __________ 0 Do not modify this bit. _____

In mode 006, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status ofthis facsimile as required for the connection to a common telephone line, with respectto the time expected for connection of communications via the line, signal transferspeed of the line, dialing system through the line, connection system to the line, andacceptability of high-speed control.

Page 325: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 69

Setting of Reception Mode for Long Documents (Mode 007)

Factory Setting

Bit Number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Value 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 (HEX: B9)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses

In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.

Bit No.AssociatedFunctions

Bit Value

SelectableStatuses

Ref. Page

7, 6, 5 Select upper limit of cut-off length after printing.

When a received document is longer than the print paper and if the excess length is shorter than that specified here, it is cut off.

If it is longer than the specified value set with these bits, it is split into multiple pages.

This feature is enabled when the following two conditions are satisfied:• When printing a received

document.• When bit 1 of this mode is 1.

000 0 mm

5-26

001 8 mm

010 12 mm

011 14 mm

100 18 mm

101 20 mm

110 24 mm

111 Not available

In mode 007, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status ofthis facsimile with respect to reception mode for long documents in comparison withthe employed print paper. An automatic mode can be selected for cutting away anexceeding document part, as it is relatively small, or for reducing the size of thereceived document.

Page 326: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 70 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

4, 3, 2 To provide a limit ratio to size reduction that this facsimile is permitted to make when having received a longer document that printable on any available printing paper, to render the received document printable in size so that in case of a [90%] limit the size reduction is permitted within a ratio range of 90% to 100%. (This function is available for reception printing only if bit 1of this mode is 0.

The changing of these bits is not necessary unless the case in which both papers, letter and legal, are installed and a legal size document is to be printed on the legal size printing paper. In this case, a setting of [80%] limit is recommended.

000 To permit no size reduction of the received document.

5-26

001 To provide a reduction limit of 95%.

010 To provide a reduction limit of 90%.

011 To provide a reduction limit of 85%.

100 To provide a reduction limit of 80%.

101 To provide a reduction limit of 65%.

110 To provide a reduction limit of 60%.

Others Do not use any other combination of bit values.

1 Selection to reduce in size or partially cut away a received document that is longer than printable on any available print paper.(Valid only when printing a received document.)

0 To perform size reduction.

5-261 To perform cutaway.

0 __________ 1 Do not modify this bit. _____

Setting of Reception Mode for Long Documents (Mode 007)

Page 327: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 71

Setting of Dividing Print, Print Paper, Reading, and Power Saving Mode (Mode 008)

Factory Setting

Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses

In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.

Bit No.AssociatedFunctions

Bit Value

SelectableStatuses

Ref. Page

7 To detect the print papers. (Valid only when printing a received document.)

0 Print paper priority. (Determines if any paper exists in any cassette or not)

5-261 Paper cassette registered size priority.

(Determined based on the paper size data set for paper cassette)

6, 5, 4, 3 To select the print paper for the received document. (Valid only when printing a received document.)

0000 Proper size paper will be selected automatically.

5-260100 Do not use wider width paper.

1000 Same width only.

Others Do not use any other combination of bit values.

2, 1, 0 __________ 000 Do not modify this bit. _____

In mode 008, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of this facsimile withrespect to dividing print, size selection, and presence detection modes of print paper in reception printing.

Page 328: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 72 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting of Display Status at Serial Broadcast Transmission (Mode 014)

Factory Setting

Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (HEX: 01)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses

In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.

Bit No.AssociatedFunctions

Bit Value

SelectableStatuses

Ref. Page

7, 6, 54, 3, 2

_______________________ 000000

Do not modify these bits. ____

1, 0 At serial broadcast transmission, select display of confirmation screen.

00 A confirmation screen is not displayed.

6-3

01 At serial broadcast transmission, a confirmation screen is displayed.

10 A confirmation screen is always displayed.

11 Do not modify this bit.

In mode 014, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of the display ofconfirmation screen at serial broadcast transmission.

Page 329: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 73

Setting the Printing Date and Time Received (Mode 016)

Factory Setting

Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Value 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 40)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses

In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.

Bit No.AssociatedFunctions

Bit Value

SelectableStatuses

Ref. Page

7 _______________________ 0 Do not modify this bit. _____

6To make a selection to use the extra telephone set or not.

0 Do not use.1-6

1 To use.

5, 4, 3, 2 __________ 0000 Do not modify this bit. _____

1 To make a selection to print or not to print the date and time received in fax mode.

0 Not to print.____

1 To print.

0 Specify the place of the printed date and time received in fax mode.

0 Print inside of document.

____1 Print outside of

document.

In mode 016, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status ofthis facsimile with respect to printing the date and time received in the mail mode/faxmode.

Page 330: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 74 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting the Non-Transmission Report (Mode 023)

Factory Setting

Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Value 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 (HEX: F8)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses

In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.

Bit No.AssociatedFunctions

Bit Value

SelectableStatuses

Ref. Page

7, 6, 5, 4 __________ 1111 Do not modify this bit. _____

3 To make a selection to attach or not to attach the sent image to the non-transmission report.

0 Not to attach image.

5-61 To attach image.

2, 1, 0 __________ 000 Do not modify this bit. _____

In mode 023, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status ofthis facsimile with respect to selecting whether to attach the sent image to the non-transmission report.

Page 331: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 75

Setting the Receiving FAX Functions (Mode 030)

Factory Setting

Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Value 1 0 1 1 0‘ 0 0 1 (HEX: B1)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses

In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.

Bit No.AssociatedFunctions

Bit Value

SelectableStatuses

Ref. Page

7 __________ 1 Do not modify this bit. _____

6, 5 To make a selection to set or not to set for Rotation Print when receiving a fax.

00 Not to set.

5-26

01 To set (without 90-degree sorting, when receiving a remote copy).

10 To set (with 90-degree sorting, when receiving a remote copy).

11 Do not modify this bit.

4 To make a selection to set or not to set 2in1 Receptions in receiving fax.

0 Not to set.5-26

1 To set.

3, 2, 1, 0 __________ 0001 Do not modify this bit. _____

In mode 030, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status ofthis facsimile with respect to setting Rotation Print / 2in1 Reception in receiving a fax.

Page 332: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 76 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting the Cassette Selection for Receiving FAX (Mode 037)

Factory Setting

Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Value 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 (HEX: F8)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses

In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.

Bit No.AssociatedFunctions

Bit Value

SelectableStatuses

Ref. Page

7 To make a selection to permit or not to permit the selection of the first cassette when receiving a fax.

0 Not to permit. (*1)

5-261 To permit.

6 To make a selection to permit or not to permit the selection of the second cassette when receiving a fax.

0 Not to permit. (*1)

5-261 To permit.

5 To make a selection to permit or not to permit the selection of the third cassette when receiving a fax. (*)

0 Not to permit. (*1)

5-261 To permit.

4 To make a selection to permit or not to permit the selection of the fourth cassette when receiving a fax. (*)

0 Not to permit. (*1)

5-261 To permit.

3 __________ 1 Do not modify this bit. _____

2 To make a selection to permit or not to permit the selection of the multi-purpose manual bypass tray when receiving a fax.

0 Not to permit. (*1)

5-261 To permit.

1, 0 __________ 00 Do not modify this bit. _____

(*) Valid only when the optional print paper cassettes are installed.

(*1) Do not set bits 7, 6, 5, 4, and 2 all to logic 0.

In mode 037, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status ofthis facsimile with respect to setting the options of the cassette and multipurposemanual bypass tray when receiving a fax.

Page 333: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 77

Setting of the Time for Auto Power Source Off (Mode 406)

Factory Setting

Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Value 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 (HEX: 1E)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses

In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.

Bit No.AssociatedFunctions

Bit ValueSelectableStatuses

Ref. Page

7, 6, 5, 4 3, 2, 1, 0

Select Auto Power Source Off time

00000000 Power source never off.

_____

00000001 Off after 1 minute

4-12

00001111 Off after 15 minutes

00011110 Off after 30 minutes

00111100 Off after 60 minutes

11110000 Off after 240 minutes

Others Not available

In mode 406, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status ofthis facsimile with respect to the Auto Power Source Off time.

Page 334: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 78 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Setting the Auto-reset After Copying by the Automatic Document Feeder (Mode 429)

Factory Setting

Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses

In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.

Bit No.AssociatedFunctions

Bit ValueSelectableStatuses

Ref. Page

7, 6 __________ 00 Do not modify this bit. _____

5 To make a selection to set or not to set the auto-reset after copying by the automatic document feeder.

0 Not to set.

_____1 To set.

4, 3, 2, 1, 0 __________ 00000 Do not modify this bit. _____

In mode 429, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status ofthis facsimile with respect to setting the auto-reset after copying by the AutomaticDocument Feeder.

Page 335: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 79

SECTION 3 ADVANCED REGISTRATION

The following section describes the procedures for registering more advancedfeatures and items into the NEC IT 3520/IT2520.

3.1 Establishing a Bulletin Board

A bulletin board needs to be established before a document can be registeredon it.

Items to be registered:� Bulletin Board Number:

Select the bulletin board number (1 to 10) to register. Up to 10 bulletin boards can becreated.

� F-CODE:

Register a F-CODE to use the bulletin board functions for each board. Up to 20characters can be registered using numbers 0~9, *, and #.

� F-CODE Password:

A password can be registered to download a document from a bulletin board. Thepassword can be set for each board. Up to 20 characters can be registered usingnumbers 0~9, *, and #.

� Name:

Register a name for a bulletin board according to its number. Up to 16 characters canbe registered.

� Remote Input Check:

Sets whether or not a password is required to register a document on a bulletin board.The factory default setting is Remote Input Check ON.

� Remote Output Check:

Sets whether or not a password is required to download a document from a bulletinboard. The factory default setting is Remote Output Check OFF.

Page 336: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 80 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Establishing a Bulletin Board

1. Press <Utility>.

2. Select [User Set], then touch [Fax Input].

3. Touch <Bultn. Board>.

4. Select a bulletin board number.

Page 337: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 81

5. Register the items required for the bulletin board:

Register the F-CODE:

1. Touch [F-CODE].

2. Enter the F-CODE, then touch [Enter].

� Make sure not to duplicate the F-CODEs for the bulletin board and the mailbox!

� To re-enter the number:Use [�] or [�] to move thecursor and re-enter thenumber, or press <C> to re-enter it. When the [Delete] keyis touched, the character onthe cursor is deleted. Whenthe [Cancel] key is touched,the display returns to the initialstatus.

� Refer to Section 2.14 F-CODE in Chapter 6 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations on page 6-22.

Establishing a Bulletin Board (Continued)

Page 338: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 82 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Registering the F-CODE Password:

1. Touch [F-CODE Password].

2. Enter the F-CODE Password, then touch [Enter].

� To re-enter the number:Use [�] or [�] to move thecursor and re-enter thenumber, or press <C> to re-enter it. When the [Delete] keyis touched, the character onthe cursor is deleted. Whenthe [Cancel] key is touched,the display returns to the initialstatus.

� Refer to Section 2.14 F-CODE in Chapter 6 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations on page 6-22.

Registering the Name:

1. Touch [Name].

2. Enter the name, then touch [Enter].

� Refer to Section 1.8 Entering Characters for Registration in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-5.

Page 339: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 83

Setting the Remote Input Check:

1. Touch [Remote Input Check].

2. Select [ON] or [OFF], then touch [Enter].

Setting the Remote Output Check:

1. Touch [Remote Output Check].

2. Select [ON] or [OFF], then touch [Enter].

Page 340: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 84 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3.2 Registering Copy Programs

Frequently used copy functions can be registered in advance and executed atthe touch of a single key. This speeds up routine copy jobs and helps toincrease office productivity.

Before Starting Operations:� Up to 10 copy programs can be registered.

� The following functions can be registered in combination with each other in the copyprograms.

� For additional details on copying using the program keys, refer to Section 2.19 UsingCopy Programs in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-76.

6. Confirm the registered details once the display has returned. Touch [Enter] if the entries are correct.

� To modify:Touch the key for the item to bemodified, and re-register it.

7. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

� To establish another bulletin board, repeat from step 3 above.

• Number of Copies • Mixed Original Detection • Edge/Frame Erase• Copy Paper Size • Cover Sheets • Image Repeating

• Zoom • Page Insertion • Image Settings• Density • OHP Interleaving • Separate Scanning

• Sort • File Margins • Black/White Reverse

Registering Copy Programs

1. Set the copy function to be registered.

2. Press <Mode Check>.

Page 341: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 85

3. Touch [Job Mem Input].

� There are four types of Confirmation screens:When [Next] is touched, the screenchanges to the next one.

When [Back] is touched, it returns tothe previous screen.

4. Touch [Input], then touch the key to register the program.

� Keys marked with this symbol have not yet been programmed. If a new program is registered in a key that was previously registered, the old program is deleted.

� To confirm the registered details:Touch the key that has already beenregistered after touching [Check].

� To delete registration:Touch the key that is alreadyregistered and touch [Delete].

5. Touch [Check], then touch the programmed key.

6. Confirm the registered details. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

� There are two type of confirmation screens. When [Next] is touched, the screen changes to the second one. When [Back] is touched on the second screen, it returns to the first screen.

Registering Copy Programs (Continued)

Page 342: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 86 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3.3 Registering the Confidential Box

In order to save documents in the confidential box, you need to register theconfidential box in advance.

� Confidential Box Name:

Register the name for the confidential box. A maximum four double-bytecharacters (eight single-byte characters, mixed usage of double andsingle bytes are acceptable) can be registered.

� F-CODE:

Register the F-CODE with which to identify the twenty digits composedof numbers and symbols 0 to 9, *, and # that can be registered.

� F-CODE Password:

Register the pass word for the confidential box. Twenty digits composedof numbers and symbols 0 to 9, *, and # that can be registered.

� Remote Input Check:

Set whether or not to have password control when receiving documentsto the confidential box from other fax machines. The default setting is[Remote Input Check Off].

7. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Registering Copy Programs (Continued)

Page 343: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 87

Registering the Confidential Box

1. Press [Utility].

2. Touch [User Set].

3. Touch [FAX Input].

4. Touch [Conf. Box].

Page 344: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 88 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

5. Select the confidential box.

6. Setting for the Confidential Box.

1. Registering the Confiden-tial Box Name:

a. Touch [Confidential Box Name].

b. Enter the confiden-tial box name, then touch [Enter].

Registering the Confidential Box

Page 345: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 4 - 89

2. Registering the F-CODE:

a. Touch [F-CODE].

b. Enter the F-CODE, then touch [Enter].

� To re-enter the number:Use [ � ] or [ � ], to movethe cursor and re-enter thenumber, or press <C>(Clear key) to re-enter it.

Touch [Delete] to erase acharacter on the cursor.

Touch [Cancel] to cancelthe procedure.

3. Registering the F-CODE Password:

a. Touch [F-CODE Password].

b. Enter the F-CODE password, then touch [Enter].

� To re-enter the number:Use [ � ] or [ � ], to movethe cursor and re-enter thenumber, or press <C>(Clear key) to re-enter it.

Touch [Delete] to erase acharacter on the cursor.

Touch [Cancel] to cancelthe procedure.

4. Registering the Remote Input Check:

a. Touch [Remote Input Check].

b. Select [ON] or [OFF] for remote input check, then touch [Enter].

Registering the Confidential Box

Page 346: IT3520_2520 User Manual

4 - 90 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

7. Confirm the registration details after the display returns to the screen shown in step 6. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

� To modify:Touch the key to modify and re-enter.

8. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

� To register another Confidential Box, repeat from step 5 above.

Registering the Confidential Box

Page 347: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 1

Chapter 5 Basic Sending and

Receiving Operations

SECTION 1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes how to operate the unit as a facsimile. First, the basicoperation items are described, in order to get the user familiar with sendingfacsimiles, the various dialing methods used to send facsimiles, as well as setting theimage quality and contrast.

In Chapter 6, more advanced operational features are covered. Items such as SerialBroadcasting, 2-Sided Transmissions, Timer Transmission, and 2in1 Transmissionare among the advanced features described.

SECTION 2 BASIC SENDING OPERATIONS

This section describes the basic operations needed to send and receive a facsimiledocument.

2.1 Quick Memory Transmission

When the NEC IT3520/IT2520 scans the first page of a document, itimmediately begins dialing the destination number. The IT3520/IT2520continues to scan the remaining pages, while it sends whatever has beenstored in memory. Many other facsimile machines do not begin sending untilall the document pages have been scanned and stored.

Before Starting Operations:

� Telephone line type:

Register the Self-Telephone Number and select the telephone line typefor your line. Refer to Setting the Line Type in Chapter 3 Registrationand Setting Operations on page 3-18.

� Using the Auto-mode Screen:

Transmission is possible using this screen just by entering a number withfour digits or more (three digits for the IT2520), or a number starting with’0’ (facsimile numbers). Refer to Section 3.3 Stand-by Screen (InitialScreen) in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-15.

Page 348: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 2 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� Using the FAX Screen:

Transmission is possible directly from this screen. Refer to Section 3.3Stand-by Screen (Initial Screen) in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page1-15.

� Using the Copy Screen:

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan> before transmission.

Transmitting when Using the Automatic Document Feeder

1. Load the document into the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Touch [10-key Dialing].

4. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the facsimile number of the destination.

Page 349: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 3

5. Press <Start>. Transmission will now begin.

� Refer to Section 6 Quitting an Operation in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-36.

� To quit sending:Press <Stop>, then select the action tosuspend.

� When memory is full:Try transmitting again after waiting formemory to be freed.

Transmitting Using the Book Scanner

1. Open the Document Cover to place the document on the glass surface.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Close the Document Cover.

3. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

4. Touch [10-key Dialing].

Transmitting when Using the Automatic Document Feeder (Continued)

Page 350: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 4 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

5. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the facsimile number of the destination.

6. Press <Start>. The Scanning screen will be displayed.

� When the memory is full:Try transmitting again after waiting formemory to be freed.

7. Touch [Scan End] after all pages have been stored into memory.

� When scanning multiple documents:Place the next document on the glasssurface and press <Start> while thescreen indicates [Restart Scan] tocontinue with scanning.

8. Press <Start>. Transmission will now begin.

� To suspend transmission:Press <Stop>, then select the action tobe suspended. Refer to Section 6Quitting an Operation in Chapter 1Getting Started on page 1-36.

Transmitting Using the Book Scanner (Continued)

Page 351: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 5

2.2 Calling the Destination and Transmitting the Document

� Using the Automatic Document Feeder:

The NEC IT3520/IT2520 will begin dialing and sending the document assoon as the first page is stored into memory. If the unit is transmitting apreviously stored document, or if the unit is currently receiving adocument, it will store your document into memory, until the previousaction is finished.

� Using the Book Scanner:

Press <Start> after scanning all the pages of the document. As soon asthe <Start> key is pressed, dialing will begin.

� Up to 200 documents can be stored in memory. If 200 documents havealready been stored, or if memory is full, no more pages can be stored.

2.3 Selecting the Communications Mode (For optional 2nd G3 Port only)

� The communication mode is selected to send the document via aspecific facsimile port.

[G3-1] Select this port to send via G3 Port 1.

[G3-2] Select this port to send via G3 Port 2.

� The communications mode returns to the default setting after eachtransmission. Refer to Section 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings inChapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-1.Also, refer to Setting Connection onto Common Telephone Line (Mode006) on page 4-68.

Page 352: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 6 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.4 Using Full Dialing for International Destinations

If the country code and the destination’s facsimile number are entered afterthe international code, a busy signal (or "fast busy") may be heard, and dialingmay be impossible.

In this case, it may be necessary to enter a pause to allow proper dialingtiming to occur. It is recommended that <Pause> be pressed twice to enter asix-second pause after the international code. After this, the rest of thenumber may be dialed as normal.

2.5 When Transmission is Unsuccessful

� A Non-transmission Report is printed whenever a document cannot besent. The report contains part of the first page image of the unsuccessfuldocument, as well as details about the attempted transmission. Refer toSetting the Non-Transmission Report (Mode 023) on page 4-74.

� If a document could not be transmitted, it can be resent (maximum of 20documents). To re-send, touch [Job List] and then touch [Com.] toidentify the unsuccessful document.

Page 353: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 7

� If either the [Re-TX] key or the [Dest. Chng] key is displayed on theTouch Panel, re-transmission is possible without the need of re-scanning. To send to the same destination, touch [Re-TX]. To send to adifferent destination, touch [Dest. Chng].

2.6 Using One-Touch Dialing

If the destination’s facsimile number is registered in advance, the desirednumber can be selected by just pressing the appropriate One-Touch key.

Before Starting Operations:� The destination’s number must be registered in advance. Refer to Section 2.12

Registering One-Touch Keys in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations onpage 3-30.

� If One-Touch keys are categorized into branch offices, regions such as the UnitedStates and International, or as customers/clients, etc., it is easier to keep track byentering the One-Touch keys into Index keys. Refer to Section 2.13 Registering anIndex for One-Touch Keys in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page3-39.

� Each One-Touch key has a One-Touch Number. A destination is selected by inputtingthe One-Touch Number (000~539) instead of pressing the One-Touch key.

� One-Touch Numbers are allocated with an index as shown:

Using One-Touch Numbers

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

(Index 1) (Index 36)

~

Page 354: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 8 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Press <#>.

4. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the One-Touch number.

� The One-Touch key which the One-Touch number is entered will be displayed in reverse.

5. Press <Start>.

Using One-Touch Numbers (Continued)

Page 355: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 9

6. Touch [Enter] after confirming the destination and the document number, etc.Transmission now begins.

� Transmission begins even if [Enter] is not touched.

Using One-Touch Keys

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Touch the One-Touch key for the desired destination.

� Using Index Keys:The first index screen is automaticallydisplayed. Touch the index tabs, [IndexList], or [�] [�] to find the desired key.

� To select multiple destinations:Touch all the keys needed. Theselected keys are displayed in reverse.

� To correct an entry:An entry can be cancelled by touchingthe key again. The desired key canthen be selected.

4. Press <Start>.

Using One-Touch Numbers (Continued)

Page 356: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 10 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.7 Searching the Destination by Name

The destination can be searched alphabetically by the names registered in theOne-Touch Keys.

Before Starting Operations:� The destination’s number must be registered in advance. Refer to 2.12 Registering

One-Touch Keys in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-30.

5. Touch [Enter] after confirming the destination and the document number, etc.Transmission now begins.

� Transmission begins even if [Enter] is not touched.

Searching the Destination by Name

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

Using One-Touch Keys (Continued)

Page 357: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 11

3. Touch [Search].

4. Touch [Search].

� Searching can be done using [�] [�].

� Keys with frames are FAX Program keys.

5. Input the spelling of the destination being searched, and touch [Enter].

Searching the Destination by Name

Page 358: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 12 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.8 Using Program Dialing Keys

Various functions can be registered as program keys for convenience andefficient operations. Items such as Serial Broadcasting, Timer Transmission,and 2in1 Transmission can all be registered in advance, and the operation isthen as simple as touching a single key.

Before Starting Operations:� The functions and destination information must be registered in advance. Up to 30

keys can be registered as Program Dialing keys. The total number of One-Touch keysand Program Dialing keys cannot exceed 540.For more information, refer to Section 2.14 Registering Program Keys in Chapter 3Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-41.

6. Confirm and touch the destination, and press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

Using Program Dialing Keys

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Searching the Destination by Name

Page 359: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 13

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Touch the Program Dialing key to be used.

� Program Dial keys are those with borders.

� Using Index Keys:The first index screen is automaticallydisplayed. Touch the index tabs, [IndexList], or [�] [�] to find the desired key.

4. Confirm the details and press <Start>.

5. Touch [Enter] after confirming the destination and the document number, etc. Transmission now begins.

� Transmission begins even if [Enter] is not touched.

Using Program Dialing Keys (Continued)

Page 360: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 14 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.9 Sending Fine Print and Photos

Setting Image Quality

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Touch [Quality&Reduction].

4. Touch [Quality] and select the image quality setting.

Selecting the appropriate image qualityfor documents containing fine print,detailed drawings, and photographs willensure that the document is sent clearly.

Page 361: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 15

5. Select the destination.

6. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

� Settings for image quality return to the default value after each transmission. Refer to Section 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-1.

Document Type Image Quality Setting

Normal sized characters (handwriting, typed, etc.) [Standard]

Fine print (newspapers, magazines, reports, etc.) or detailed drawings

[Fine][Super Fine]

Photos and text mixed [Text + Photo]

Photos [GSR][Super GSR]

• If the destination’s facsimile does not support Super Fine, Super GSR, or Text+Photo, then the document is sent in either Fine or GSR automatically.

• When GSR, Super GSR, or Text+Photo is selected the image quality may deteriorate depending on the quality and the paper size of the destination’s facsimile.

• Transmission of a document containing photos may produce stripes across the photo, depending on the original photograph. If the stripes are too distinctive, select either GSR or Super GSR when sending the document.

Setting Image Quality (Continued)

Page 362: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 16 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.10 Adjusting Contrast

The image contrast can be adjusted to suit the darkness of characters andpaper used when sending a document. For example, if the characters areprinted on colored paper, the contrast can be adjusted to compensate for thecolored paper.

Adjusting Contrast

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Touch [Quality&Reduction].

4. Touch [Contrast].

Page 363: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 17

2.11 Sending Documents without Reduction

Normally, a document is automatically reduced to fit the paper size of therecipient’s facsimile. If automatic size reduction is not desired, or if thedocument must be sent in its original size, the Nonreduction mode is available.

5. Select the desired contrast setting.

� Adjusting the contrast level:Five levels are available. Thetransmitted document gets lighter eachtime [Lighter] is touched (use this fordark colored paper). The level getsdarker each time [Darker] is touched(use this for faint or colored characters).

6. Select the destination.

7. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

� The contrast selection automatically returns to the default value after each transmission.

Nonreduction Mode

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Adjusting Contrast (Continued)

Page 364: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 18 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Touch [Quality&Reduction].

4. Touch [Reduction/Area].

5. Touch [Reduction].

Nonreduction Mode (Continued)

Page 365: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 19

2.12 Selecting the Scan Area

The area of the document to be scanned can be specified. Part of a largedocument can be sent, or irregular-sized documents can be sent.

6. Touch [No Reduction], then touch [Enter].

� Setting:When [Auto Size] is selected, the unitautomatically adjusts the size of thedocument to that of the recipient.When [No Reduction] is selected, thedocument is sent in its original sizeregardless of the recipient’s paper size.

7. Select the destination.

8. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

� The size reduction setting returns to [Auto Size] after each transmission.

Selecting the Scan Area

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Nonreduction Mode (Continued)

Page 366: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 20 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Touch [Quality&Reduction].

4. Touch [Reduction/Area].

5. Touch [Scan Area].

Selecting the Scan Area (Continued)

Page 367: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 21

6. Select the area to be scanned and touch [Enter].

� Selecting the area:Touch a key to adjust the size anddirection of the area of the document tobe scanned.When [Auto Detect.] is touched, thescanned area that most closelymatches the document size isautomatically set.

7. Select the destination.

8. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

� The setting for the scanned area returns to [Auto Detect.] after each transmission.

Confirming the Scanning Area:

The area scanned by the book scanner should be checked against themark on the periphery of the glass surface. For example, when Letter (8 1/2"x11") is selected, the part of the documentshown is sent.

Selecting the Scan Area (Continued)

Page 368: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 22 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.13 Using Chain Dialing

Multiple One-Touch keys can be combined together to allow dialing ofauthorization codes, extensions, PINs, etc., that may exceed the digit length ofa single One-Touch key.

Before Starting Operations:� Chain Dialing is possible by using the 10-key Pad, in combination with a One-Touch

key.

� Numbers up to 192 digits long can be dialed when chain dialing is used. Numbers upto 40 digits long are displayed on the touch panel screen.

Using Chain Dialing

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Touch [Chain Dial].

� When [Chain Dial] is touched, [Chain Dial] key is highlighted and this icon is displayed.

Page 369: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 23

4. Select the destination. Using One-touch keys:

1. Touch the One-Touch key.

� Refer to Section 2.6 Using One-Touch Dialing on page 5-7.

� When a One-Touch key is touched:This icon isdisplayed —

� To confirm the number:When the cursor ismoved to the icon,after [10-key Dialing]is touched, thenumber is displayedthat is registered inthe One-Touch key.Use [�] [�] to movethe cursor.

� To continue the number:Touch a One-Touch key toselect the next part of theChain Dial.

Using Chain Dialing (Continued)

Page 370: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 24 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

SECTION 3 BASIC RECEIVING OPERATIONS

When the NEC IT3520/IT2520 is in Automatic Reception mode, documents will bereceived without any user intervention. Manual Reception mode is also available.This section describes the receiving procedure concerning paper sizes and how theunit handles an out-of-paper condition.

3.1 Changing the Reception Mode

There are two methods to receive a facsimile:

� Automatic Reception:

The NEC IT3520/IT2520 will automatically answer the incoming call andreceive the facsimile without any action from the user.

5. Select a destination. Using the 10-key Pad:

1. Touch [10-key Dialing] and use the 10-key Pad to enter the destination’s number.

� Refer to Section 2.1 Quick Memory Transmission on page 5-1.

� To re-enter the number:Use [�] [�] to move thecursor and re-enter individualdigits, or press <C> and re-enter the entire number,When [Delete] is touched,the character above thecursor is deleted.

6. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

Using Chain Dialing (Continued)

Page 371: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 25

� Manual Reception:

When an extra telephone set is connected to the unit, manual receptionis available. The user must pick up the telephone handset, press<Start>, and hang up the handset in order to receive a facsimile. Thismode is mainly used if the user location only has a single telephone line,and that line is used for both voice calls and facsimile calls.

� Refer to Section 2.5 Setting for Received Documents in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-43.

3.2 While Receiving a Document

� The touch panel displays a receiving icon:

� When reception is complete, a beep is heard.

3.3 When the Recording Paper Runs Out

� The touch panel displays an alarm icon indicating the lack of paper.

� When paper runs out, the paper level indication turns red to alert theuser.

� The received document(s) is stored in memory. Once the paper supplyis replenished, any stored documents will automatically be printed.

� If memory becomes full, no further document data can be stored.

No Paper Icon

Page 372: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 26 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3.4 Paper Sizes and Document Formats

� The received document sizes can be:

� Ledger (11" by 17")

� Legal (8 1/2" by 14")

� Letter (Portrait - 8 1/2" by 11")

� Letter (Wide - 11" by 8 1/2")

� If the recording paper installed is not the same size as that of thereceiving facsimile, the document is either printed on the next larger sizepaper (if installed), or the facsimile is reduced to fit on the availablepaper size.For example, if a ledger-sized document is received and the IT3520/IT2520 has only letter-sized paper installed, the document is reducedand printed on the letter-sized paper. Refer to Section 2.5 Setting forReceived Documents in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and SettingOperations on page 4-43.

� When letter-sized documents are received, the page is rotated by 90o

and will be printed, even though the documents were inserted (at thesource-end) in a different direction than the print paper (Rotation Print).

� A received document cannot be printed on paper inserted in the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray. Refer to Setting the Cassette Selectionfor Receiving FAX (Mode 037) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration andSetting Operations on page 4-76.

� Refer to Setting of Dividing Print, Print Paper, Reading, and PowerSaving Mode (Mode 008) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration andSetting Operations on page 4-71, and Setting the Receiving FAXFunctions (Mode 030) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and SettingOperations on page 4-75.

3.5 When Receiving Long Documents

� When a document is received that is longer than the normal paper sizes,the document image is reduced as shown below. In this case, theoptimal reduction ratio is automatically selected to fit the image onto theprint paper.

Page 373: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 27

� If the received document is too long to be printed on the installed printpaper (even to the maximum reduction amount of 60%), the image isdivided and printed on multiple pages. In this case, the transition area(the area where the image is divided) is printed on both pages.The maximum reduction ratio can be set. The "Cut Off" mode is alsoavailable, in which case the excess area is ignored when printed.

For more details, refer to Section 2.5 Setting for Received Documents inChapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-43,and Setting of Reception Mode for Long Documents (Mode 007) inChapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-69.

3.6 Making and Receiving Telephone Calls

The NEC IT3520/IT2520 can be used to make voice calls in addition tofacsimiles. This section describes the method of using a telephone connectedto the unit.

Before Starting Operations:� An external telephone (not provided) must be connected to the jack marked ’TEL’ on

the back of the unit.

Page 374: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 28 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Making a Call:

1. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

2. Pick up the handset.

� Make sure that a dial tone is heard from the handset.

3. Dial the number from the telephone.

4. Use the handset in the same manner as a regular telephone.

5. Hang up the handset when the call is complete.

Making an On-hook Call:

1. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

2. With the handset in place, touch [On-hook Dial].

� Make sure that a dial tone is heard from the unit.

3. Select the destination number.

Page 375: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 5 - 29

4. When you hear the call being answered, touch [On-hook Dial] to take the unit off hook.

5. Hang up the handset when the call is complete.

Receiving a Call:

1. Lift up the handset when a ringer is heard.

� Refer to Section 2.5 Setting for Received Documents in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-43.

2. If a facsimile tone is heard, press <Start> and hang up the handset. The facsimile will be now be received.

3. If a voice call was received, hang up the handset when the call is completed.

Making an On-hook Call: (Continued)

Page 376: IT3520_2520 User Manual

5 - 30 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 377: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 1

Chapter 6 Advanced Sending

and Receiving

Operations

SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

This chapter describes the various operational procedures for advanced receivingand transmitting features of the NEC IT3520/IT2520. Items such as SerialBroadcasting, Timer Transmission, and 2in1 Transmission along with many others,will be explained in detail.

SECTION 2 ADVANCED TRANSMISSION OPERATIONS

2.1 Serial Broadcast Transmission

Serial Broadcasting allows transmission of a document to multipledestinations. The document is stored in memory, then the IT3520/IT2520 cansequentially send the document to up to 300 destinations.

Before Starting Operations:� Up to 300 destinations can be selected for each transmission. However, only up to

twelve can be specified when using the 10-key Pad for dialing the destination.

Using One-Touch Dialing:� Facsimile numbers must be registered in advance. Refer to Section 2.12 Registering

One-Touch Keys in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-30.

� More than one number can be registered in a Program key. Refer to Section 2.14Registering Program Keys in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page3-41.

Page 378: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 2 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Serial Broadcast Transmission

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Touch <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Select all the destinations to which the document is to be sent.

Selecting with One-Touch Keys:

1. On the One-Touch screen(s), select all the destinations required.

� Refer to Section 2.6 Using One-Touch Dialing in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-7.

Selecting with the 10-key Pad:

1. Enter the destination’s facsimile number using the 10-key Pad.

2. To add another location, touch [Add Dest.].

3. Enter the next number.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all locations have been entered.

Page 379: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 3

Selecting with a Program Key:

1. Touch the required Program key(s) on the touch panel.

� Refer to Section 2.8 Using Program Dialing Keys in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-12.

4. Press <Start>.

5. Confirm the destinations and touch [Enter].

� If the destination is selected via a Program key, this screen will not appear.

6. Confirm the number of destinations and the facsimile number, then press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

� The mode check screen can be selected to be displayed or not, by setting the software switch. Refer to Setting of Display Status at Serial Broadcast Transmission (Mode 014) on page 4-72.

Page 380: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 4 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Confirming the Status of the Serial Broadcast Transmission

The Serial Broadcast Report presents a detailed status report of all aspects ofthe transmission.

Page 381: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 5

2.2 Printing TSI Information

The Transmitter Subscriber’s Identification (TSI) helps the recipient identifythe sender, as well as provide the date, time, and page numbers of thetransmission.

Multiple TSI can be registered. An internal fax can be sent in the name of thedepartment or division, while an external fax can be sent in the companyname.

Before Starting Operations:� The date, time, and sending station’s name must be registered in advance. Refer to

Section 2.6 Registering the Transmitter Subscriber’s Identification (TSI) in Chapter 3Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-19, and Section 1.7 Required InitialRegistration/Settings and Confirmation in Chapter 3 Registration and SettingOperations on page 3-4.

� A maximum of eight TSI can be registered.

Setting the TSI

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

Standard TSIIndividual User TSI

Page 382: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 6 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.3 Destination Insertion

When a document is transmitted, the recipient’s name can be printed alongwith the TSI. The recipient can easily confirm to whom the document isaddressed.

Before Starting Operations:� This function prints a recipient name as it is registered in a One-Touch key. The

recipient’s information must be registered in advance as a One-Touch key.

� The recipient’s name cannot be inserted when using 10-key dialing, or when the ChainDialing feature is used.

� The name of each recipient is printed on documents when using Serial BroadcastTransmission.

� The setting is reset after each transmission.

� Refer to Setting the Document Destination Insert (Mode 001) in Chapter 4 AdvancedRegistration and Setting Operations on page 4-65.

3. Select [Set 1] from [FAX Menu], then touch [TSI].

4. Select the TSI, then touch [Enter].

� To cancel:Touch cancel.

5. Select the destination.

6. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

Setting the TSI (Continued)

Page 383: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 7

2.4 Printing the Transmission Report

A Transmission Report can be set to print after every transmission, print onlywhen a transmission failed, or not to print.

Destination Insert

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Select [Set 1] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Dest. Insert].

4. Select the destination.

5. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

Printing the Transmission Report

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

Page 384: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 8 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3. Select [Set 1] from [FAX Menu], then touch [TX Report].

4. Select the printout condition of the Transmission Report, then touch [Enter].

� How to select:[Default]: Transmission Report will beprinted in a preset manner. Refer toStep 7.

[ON]: Transmission Report will beprinted after every fax sent.

[If TX Fail]: Transmission Report will beprinted only if a fax could not be sent.

[OFF]: Transmission Report will not beprinted whether a fax is successful ornot.

5. Select the destination.

6. Press [Start]. Transmission now begins.

Printing the Transmission Report (Continued)

Page 385: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 9

2.5 2 in 1 Transmission

The 2 in 1 Transmission feature allows the user to send two consecutiveletter-sized pages as a single page. The two pages are reduced beforesending, and will be received and printed as one letter-sized page. Thisfeature is convenient for saving telephone line charges (only one page isbeing sent), as well as saving consumables on the recipient’s end (i.e. lesstoner and paper are used).

Before Starting Operations:� Only the Automatic Document Feeder can be used to scan documents for the 2 in 1

feature.

� Only letter-sized documents can be used.

� The letter paper must be inserted into the ADF in the portrait direction.

� The 2 in 1 Transmission feature is reset after each transmission.

7. After the transmission, the report is printed.

Printing the Transmission Report (Continued)

Page 386: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 10 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.6 2-Sided Transmission

This feature allows a two-sided page to be scanned and transmitted.

Before Starting Operations:� Any document sent by using this feature can only be printed on one side of the paper

at the recipient’s end.

� Real-Time Transmission, 2in1 Transmission, and using the TX Marker cannot be usedwith this feature.

2 in 1 Transmission

1. Load the document in the ADF in the portrait direction.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Select [Set 1] from [FAX Menu], and touch [2 in 1].

4. Select the destination.

5. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

Page 387: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 11

2-Sided Transmission

1. Load the document in the ADF with the front side face up.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Select [Set 1] from [FAX Menu], then touch [2-Sided TX].

Page 388: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 12 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

4. Select the margin of the document, then touch [Enter].

Setting the document margin:

1. Select the document margin (standard or top).

2. Touch either [Standard Book] or [Top Margin], according to the way the document is laid out.

3. To automatically set the margin, touch [Auto]. Touch [Cancel] to cancel the setting.

Setting the document direction:

1. Touch [Document Direction].

2. Select the document direction, then touch [Enter].

2-Sided Transmission (Continued)

Page 389: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 13

5. Select the destination.

6. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

2-Sided Transmission (Continued)

Page 390: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 14 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.7 Rotation Transmission of Letter-sized Document

When the longer side of the letter-sized paper (8.5"x11") is inserted into thedocument feeder, the document is treated as an 11"x17" sized document inthe recipient’s facsimile machine. If the recipient fax machine uses letter-sized paper, the document will be reduced. However, if you set RotationTransmission, the machine will be able to transmit the letter-sized document inits original size, regardless of the document insertion direction.

Before Starting Operations:� The rotation Transmission function is only applicable to letter-sized documents.

� Rotation Transmission cannot be set at the same time with Real-Time Transmissionand 2 in 1 Transmission.

Rotation Transmission of Letter-sized Documents

1. Load the document with the longer side inserted into the document feeder.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Select [Set 1] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Rotation TX].

� [Rotation TX] will be highlighted.

4. Select the destination.

5. Press <Start>. Scanning now begins.

Page 391: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 15

2.8 Priority Transmission

This feature allows an urgent document to be transmitted with top priority. If aserial broadcast is in progress, the urgent document can be stored intomemory and will be sent as soon as the job in progress is finished. The urgentdocument is then transmitted and the serial broadcast then resumes where itwas interrupted.

Before Starting Operations:� Only one recipient can be specified for this feature.

� The Timer Transmission feature cannot be used with this feature.

Priority Transmission

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Select [Set 2] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Priority TX].

4. Select the destination.

5. Press <Start>. The document will be now be scanned.

Page 392: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 16 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.9 Timer Transmission

The Timer Transmission feature allows a scanned document to be sent at aspecific time. This can save on long-distance and international call charges bytiming the transmissions after telephone rates are discounted.

Before Starting Operations:� Use the 24-hour clock to set the time. The time must be set accurately in order for the

document to be sent at the correct time.

� The timer setting is reset after each transmission.

� Up to 200 documents can be stored for Timer Transmission.

� Real-Time Transmission and Priority Transmission features cannot be performed incombination with a Timer Transmission.

Timer Transmission

1. Load the document in the Automatic Document Feeder.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Select [Set 2] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Timer Set].

Page 393: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 17

2.10 Using the TX Marker

The TX Marker feature stamps a small red mark at either the bottom, or thetop and bottom of each scanned page. This confirms to the user that a pagewas successfully scanned into memory.

Before Starting Operations:� An optional TX Marker Stamp Unit is required for this function.

� Replace the spare TX Marker when the print becomes too light. Refer to Section 9.3Installing and Replacing the Spare Transmission (TX) Marker Stamp in Chapter 1Getting Started on page 1-65.

� The TX Marker cannot be used with the copy features.

� Only the ADF can be used for the TX Marker feature. When using the book scannerthe TX Marker will not be stamped on the page.

� Refer to Setting the Transmission Marker and Password Check (Mode 000) in Chapter4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-64.

4. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the desired transmission time, then touch [Enter].

� Setting the time:Touch [Hour] or [Minute], and use the10-key Pad to enter the time. The numbers can be cleared bypressing <C>. Enter 00:00 for 24:00.

� To Cancel:Touch [Cancel] to cancel.

5. Select the destination.

6. Press <Start>. The document is stored into memory and will be sent at the specified time.

Using the TX Marker

1. Load the document in the ADF.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

Timer Transmission (Continued)

Page 394: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 18 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

TX Marker Conditions:

� When either the Real-Time Transmission or Manual Transmission function isselected, a marker will stamp only on pages successfully transmitted.

� When Quick Memory Transmission is selected, a marker is printed showingthat the document pages have successfully been scanned into memory. Inthis case, refer to the Activity List or the Transmission Report to verify that thetransmission was successful.

3. Select [Set 2] from [FAX Menu], then touch [TX Marker].

4. Select the desired stamping position, then touch [Enter].

5. Select the destination.

6. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

� The TX Marker setting returns to the default status after each transmission.

Using the TX Marker (Continued)

Page 395: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 19

Position of the TX Marker:

� The TX Marker can be set to stamp the bottom of a page, or the top andbottom of a page. Refer to Figure 6-1 TX Marker Position. Refer to Section 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 AdvancedRegistration and Setting Operations on page 4-1.

2.11 Real-Time Transmission

The Real-Time Transmission feature allows sending documents page-by-page, without first storing them into memory.

Before Starting Operations:� The ADF is the only scanning method available with this feature.

� Real-Time Transmission cannot be used while another document is being sent orreceived.

� The feature can only be used for a single transmission at a time.

� The Timer Transmission feature cannot be used with Real-Time Transmission.

Figure 6-1 TX Marker Position

Real-Time Transmission

1. Load the document in the Automatic Document Feeder.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

Page 396: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 20 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.12 Password Transmission

Password Transmission is used to make certain that important documents canonly be sent to the proper recipient station. A 2-digit password is registered isregistered in both the sending and receiving facsimile units. If the passwordsmatch, the document is sent successfully; however, if the passwords do notmatch on both sides, the communication fails.

Before Starting Operations:� The same password must be registered at both sending and receiving sides. Refer to

Section 2.11 Registering Passwords for Secured Communications in Chapter 3Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-28.

� This feature may not work on all manufacturer’s units installed at the receiving end.

� Refer to Setting the Transmission Marker and Password Check (Mode 000) in Chapter4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-64.

3. Select [FAX] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Real-Time].

4. Select the destination.

5. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

� The NEC IT3520/IT2520 will return to the initial sending status after each transmission.

Real-Time Transmission (Continued)

Page 397: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 21

2.13 Remote Copying

The Remote Copying function allows the sender to specify how many copiesof the transmitted document are to be printed at the receiving end.

Before Starting Operations:� Up to 99 copies can be specified.

� This function is only available if the receiving facsimile has the Remote Copyingfunction using F-CODE, otherwise the transmission will fail.

� The Remote Copying setting is reset after each transmission.

Password Transmission

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Select [FAX] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Password TX].

4. Select the destination.

5. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

Remote Copying

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Page 398: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 22 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2.14 F-CODE

The F-CODE provides a facsimile communication function using codes suchas Sub-Address (SUB), Selective Polling (SEP), and Password (PWD) asdefined in the G3 standard of the International Telecommunications Union(ITU-T).

The F-CODE enables confidential transmission and bulletin boardcommunications between facsimiles that support the F-CODE. The 10-keyPad digits and symbols are used to specify the F-CODE.

� SUB:

Specified when transmitting using an F-CODE.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Select [FAX] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Remote Copy].

4. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the number of copies to be printed at the remote side, then touch [Enter].

� Specify up to 99 copies.

� The numbers can be cleared by pressing <C>.

5. Select the destination.

6. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

Remote Copying (Continued)

Page 399: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 23

� SEP:

Specified to retrieve a document stored on a facsimile at the transmittingside by calling that facsimile (Receive Polling).

� SID/PWD:

Specified when the called facsimile is password protected.

Before Starting Operations:� When an F-CODE is entered using the number keys, F-CODE transmission can only

be used for one recipient per transmission. Note that F-CODE cannot be specified forindividual recipients when documents are transmitted to multiple recipientssimultaneously (Serial Broadcast Transmission).

� When an F-CODE is registered in a One-Touch key, F-CODE transmission toindividual recipients is possible.

Confidential F-CODE Transmission:

Individual mailboxes are created in the IT3520/IT2520 by registering individualF-CODEs for each user. A password is required to download the receiveddocument, so confidential communications can be sent between facsimiles.

Page 400: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 24 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Bulletin Boards:

Documents can be disclosed to anyone who wants to access them by usingan F-CODE to establish a Bulletin Board. Documents on a bulletin board canbe downloaded to your facsimile by inputting the F-CODE registered for theBulletin Board.

� Establishing a Bulletin Board - Refer to Section 3.1 Establishing aBulletin Board in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and SettingOperations on page 4-79.

� Sending a document to a Bulletin Board - Refer to Section 2.15Registering a Document on a Bulletin Board on page 6-25.

� Downloading a registered document from a Bulletin Board - Referto Section 3.4 Retrieving from a Bulletin Board on page 6-34.

Procedure for Confidential F-CODE Transmission

1. Select [F-CODE], then touch [F-CODE (SUB)] when facsimile transmission is used.

� When an F-CODE password is required:Select the F-CODE password (SID/PWD).

� F-CODEs can be registered in a One-Touch key . Refer to Section 2.12 Registering One-Touch Keys in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-30.

� To print Confidential F-CODE documents:Press [Job List] to print the documentfrom the [Doc.] confirmation screen.

� Refer to Section 2.8 Selecting the Various Copy Formats in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-48.

Page 401: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 25

Remote Multi-Copies:

The sender can specify the number of copies to be printed at the receivingside.

� Procedure for Remote Multi-CopyingSpecify the F-CODE (SUB) as follows:

Details on setting an F-CODE:

When the NEC IT3520/IT2520 receives an F-CODE, it first searches for theF-CODE from the Bulletin Board (1 to 10), and if there is no appropriateF-CODE, it goes on to search the Confidential Boxes (1 to 10) that have beenset for each user.

2.15 Registering a Document on a Bulletin Board

Documents can be made available to anyone by establishing a mailbox on theunit. Those who know the password can register documents on the BulletinBoard either on-site, or from a remote facsimile.

For example, a Bulletin Board might be established to hold a company’s latestsales brochure, or technical information updates about a certain product. Thisinformation can be retrieved ’on demand’, at the convenience of the recipient.

Before Starting Operations:� Before registering a document on a Bulletin Board, the Bulletin Board must be

established do that F-CODE passwords can be registered. Refer to Section 3.1Establishing a Bulletin Board in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and SettingOperations on page 4-79.

� 02 � 05Specifies the desired number of copies tobe printed at the receiving end.

Function code:Specify ’02’ for the Remote Multi-Copyingfunction.

When you set an F-CODE, it is recommended to manage themby classifying the numbers for the Confidential Box and theBulletin Board.

Page 402: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 26 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

� When documents are registered on a Bulletin Board from a remote facsimile, theF-CODE and F-CODE password registered for each Bulletin Board need to bespecified. If the F-CODE and F-CODE password do not match, the document cannotbe registered on the Bulletin Board. Refer to Section 2.14 F-CODE on page 6-22.

� Up to 10 Bulletin Boards can be established. Only one document can be registeredper Bulletin Board.

� If a new document is registered on a Bulletin Board where another already exists, thenew document data replaces the previously registered data.

Registering a Document on a Bulletin Board

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Select [Appl.] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Bulletin Reg].

4. Touch the Bulletin Board number to register the document.

Page 403: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 27

5. Select the image quality, then touch [Next].

6. Select the contrast setting, then touch [Next].

7. Select the reduction and scan area settings, then touch [Next].

8. Select the transmission function.

9. Press <Start>. The document is now transmitted.

Registering a Document on a Bulletin Board (Continued)

Page 404: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 28 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

10. Touch [Enter].

Registering a Document from a Remote Facsimile

1. Place the document in the unit.

2. Set the transmission features (such as image quality, contrast, etc.).

3. Enter ’SUB’ for the F-CODE of the Bulletin Board to register the document.

4. Enter ’SID/PWD’ for the password of the Bulletin Board (F-CODE password) to register the document.

5. Dial the facsimile number of the NEC IT3520/IT2520.

6. Press the unit’s Start key (or its equivalent). The document is sent to the IT3520/IT2520 and is registered into the proper Bulletin Board.

� Any previously registered document in the Bulletin Board will be replaced by this new incoming document.

Registering a Document on a Bulletin Board (Continued)

Page 405: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 29

2.16 Polling Transmission

This feature allows the receiving side toautomatically request transmission ofdocuments stored into the memory of thesending side.

Before Starting Operations:� The document stored in memory is deleted

after it is transmitted.

� Polling Transmission is not available if the memory is full.

� Only one document can be selected for Polling Transmission. This feature cannot beused if there is another document already selected to be sent.

� The feature is reset after each transmission.

Polling Transmission

1. Load the document in the unit.

� Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3. Select [Appl.] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Polling TX].

4. Select the image quality for the document to be sent, then touch [Next].

� Refer to Section 2.9 Sending Fine Print and Photos in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-14.

Page 406: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 30 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

5. Select the contrast setting for the document to be sent, then touch [Next].

� Refer to Section 2.10 Adjusting Contrast in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-16.

6. Select the reduction and the scanning area of the document to be sent, then touch [Next].

� Refer to Section 2.11 Sending Documents without Reduction in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-17, and Section 2.12 Selecting the Scan Area in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-19.

7. Select the desired transmission setting(s).

8. Press <Start>. The document is scanned.

9. Touch [Enter].

Polling Transmission (Continued)

Page 407: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 31

2.17 Manual Reception

The NEC IT3520/IT2520 normally receives a document automatically(Automatic Reception), but you can also receive a document after talking onthe telephone.

Before Starting Operations:� An external telephone (not provided) is required for Manual Reception.

Switching to Manual Reception

1. Touch [Manual] on the reception mode setting screen.

� Skip this step if [Manual] is highlighted.

� Refer to Section 2.3 Setting the Reception Functions in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-35.

2. Touch [Enter] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Manual Reception Procedure

1. When the telephone rings, press <Fax/Mail/Scan> and then pick up the handset to speak to the caller.

2. After talking, press <Start> when you hear facsimile tones through the handset.

3. Replace the handset in its cradle.

� A "beep" sound is heard when reception is completed.

Page 408: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 32 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

SECTION 3 ADVANCED RECEPTION OPERATIONS

3.1 Password Reception

When a receive password is set, a document will only be received when bothsending and receiving ends have matching passwords. This feature can beused to filter out junk facsimiles.

Necessary registration:

The Communication Password must be registered in advance. Refer toSection 2.11 Registering Passwords for Secured Communications in Chapter3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-28.

Before Starting Operations:� The sender’s facsimile must be registered with the same communication password as

registered in the IT3520/IT2520. Depending on the sender’s make and model offacsimile, password communication may not be possible.

� To use this feature, a software switch must be set. Refer to Setting the TransmissionMarker and Password Check (Mode 000) on page 4-64.

3.2 Selecting Password Reception

Refer to Section 2.3 Setting the Reception Functions in Chapter 4 AdvancedRegistration and Setting Operations on page 4-35.

3.3 Receive Polling and Start Timer

When Receive Polling is selected, a document stored at the remote side canbe retrieved by the NEC IT3520/IT2520. A timer may be added to the pollingfeature, so that the document is retrieved at a specified time.

Receive Polling

1. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

Page 409: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 33

2. Select [Appl.] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Polling RX].

3. Select the destination input method.

4. Select the sender’s facsimile number, and touch [Next].

5. Select the reception time.

� Select the time:Touch [Hour] or [Minute] and use the10-key Pad to enter the time. The digitscan be cleared by pressing <C>.

� When reception time is not selected:Touch [Timer Off].

6. Press <Start>.

Receive Polling (Continued)

Page 410: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 34 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3.4 Retrieving from a Bulletin Board

A document that has been registered on another unit’s Bulletin Board can bedownloaded.

Before Starting Operations:� Use a F-CODE to select the Bulletin Board. The F-CODE that has been registered for

each Bulletin Board number must be confirmed with the other party in advance ofstarting.

� If access to the Bulletin Board is password restricted by the other party’s facsimile, theF-CODE password also needs to be confirmed.

Downloading Documents Registered on your IT3520/IT2520’s Bulletin Board:� Different operations must be used to download documents registered on your own

facsimile’s Bulletin Board.

7. Touch [Enter]. Reception will begin at the specified time.

Retrieving a Document from a Bulletin Board

1. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

2. Select [Appl.] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Retrieve].

Receive Polling (Continued)

Page 411: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 6 - 35

3. Select the destination input method.

� Using One-Touch dialing to select:The F-CODE must be registered inadvance.

Using the 10-key Pad to Select:

1. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the facsimile number, then touch [F-CODE].

2. Touch [F-CODE (SEP)].

� Inputting the F-CODE password:Touch [F-CODE(SID/PWD)]in the same way, and enterthe F-CODE password.

3. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the F-CODE of the Bulletin Board, then touch [Enter].

Retrieving a Document from a Bulletin Board (Continued)

Page 412: IT3520_2520 User Manual

6 - 36 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

4. Touch [Enter].

5. Touch [Next].

Retrieving a Document from a Bulletin Board (Continued)

4. Select the reception time.

� Procedure for setting:Touch [Hour] or [Minute], and use the10-key Pad to enter the time. The digitscan be deleted by pressing <C>.

� When reception time is not selected:Touch [Timer Off].

5. Press <Start>.

6. Touch [Enter]. Reception will begin at the specified time.

Using the 10-key Pad to Select:

Page 413: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 7 - 1

Chapter 7 Reports and Lists

SECTION 1 REPORTS AND LISTS

The NEC IT3520/IT2520 is designed to print a variety of reports for users to check thestatus of operations such as transmissions, receptions, and other communicationsreports. In addition, the unit will print confirmation lists of data registered in themachine, such as facsimile numbers, program keys, index keys, etc.

1.1 Printing the Activity Report (TX)

The transmission activity report verifies, in report form, important details aboutthe transmitted communications.

Before Starting Operations:� This section describes how to manually print out the report.

� The IT3520/IT2520 is set to automatically print out this report after 50 transmissions.(Default is 50 transmissions). Refer to Section 2.6 Report Print Settings in Chapter 4Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-54.

� The method of printing the TX Report for Serial Broadcasting can be selected bysetting the software switch. Refer to Setting the Memory Clear Report and TX Reportfor Serial Broadcast (Mode 002) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and SettingOperations on page 4-66.

Printing the Activity Report (TX)

1. Press <Utility>, and touch [Reports].

Page 414: IT3520_2520 User Manual

7 - 2 Reports and Lists

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

2. Touch [TX Act. Report].

3. Touch [Enter]. The Activity Report (TX) is printed.

� The report is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Figure 7-1 Activity Report (TX) Example

Printing the Activity Report (TX) (Continued)

Page 415: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 7 - 3

1.2 Printing the Activity Report (RX)

The reception activity report verifies, in report form, important details about thereceived communications.

Before Starting Operations:� This section describes how to manually print out the report.

� Refer to Section 2.6 Report Print Settings in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration andSetting Operations on page 4-54.

Printing the Activity Report (RX)

1. Press <Utility>, and touch [Reports].

2. Touch [RX Act. Report].

3. Touch [Enter]. The Activity Report (RX) is printed.

� The report is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Page 416: IT3520_2520 User Manual

7 - 4 Reports and Lists

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

1.3 Printing the One-Touch Key List

The facsimile destinations registered in One-Touch Keys can be printed.

Figure 7-2 Activity Report (RX) Example

Printing the One-Touch Key List

1. Press <Utility>, and touch [Reports].

Page 417: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 7 - 5

2. Touch [One-Touch List].

3. Touch [Enter]. The One-Touch List is printed.

� The list is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Figure 7-3 One-Touch Key List Example

Printing the One-Touch Key List

Page 418: IT3520_2520 User Manual

7 - 6 Reports and Lists

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

1.4 Printing the FAX Program List

The information registered in the facsimile program keys can be printed.

Printing the FAX Program List

1. Press <Utility>, and touch [Reports].

2. Touch [FAX Program List].

3. Select the program key to be printed.

4. Touch [Enter]. The FAX Program List is printed.

� The list is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Page 419: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 7 - 7

1.5 Bulletin Board List

The list of documents registered on the Bulletin Board(s) can be printed inreport form.

Before Starting Operations:� Refer to Section 3.1 Establishing a Bulletin Board in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration

and Setting Operations on page 4-79, Section 2.15 Registering a Document on aBulletin Board in Chapter 6 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations on page 6-25, and Section 3.4 Retrieving from a Bulletin Board in Chapter 6 Advanced Sendingand Receiving Operations on page 6-34.

Figure 7-4 FAX Program List Example

Page 420: IT3520_2520 User Manual

7 - 8 Reports and Lists

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Printing the Bulletin Board List

1. Press <Utility>, and touch [Reports].

2. Touch [Bulletin Board List].

3. Touch [Enter]. The Bulletin Board List is printed.

� The list is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Page 421: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 7 - 9

1.6 Confirming the Confidential Box Information

Registered information in the Confidential Box can be printed as a confidentiallist.

Figure 7-5 Bulletin Board List Example

Confirming the Confidential Box Information

1. Press <Utility>.

2. Touch [Reports].

3. Touch [Confidential List].

Page 422: IT3520_2520 User Manual

7 - 10 Reports and Lists

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

1.7 Printing the Account List

Account data, such as the Account name and setting status forcommunications data, can be confirmed for each Account.

Before Starting Operations:� All data registered for each Account can be printed.

4. Touch [Enter]. The Confidential List is now printed.

� The list is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Figure 7-6 Confidential List Example

Confirming the Confidential Box Information

Page 423: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 7 - 11

Printing the Account List :

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator management screen and touch [Rep. Print].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2. Touch [Account List].

3. Touch [Enter]. The Account List is printed.

� The list is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Page 424: IT3520_2520 User Manual

7 - 12 Reports and Lists

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Report Details

1.8 Printing the Setting List

The status of the various machine settings can be verified with the Setting List.

Before Starting Operations:� This report can only be printed by the administrator.

Figure 7-7 Account List Example

Printing the Setting List

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen, and touch [Rep. Print].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

Page 425: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 7 - 13

2. Touch [Setting List].

3. Touch [Enter]. The Setting List is printed.

� The list is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Figure 7-8 Setting List Example

Printing the Setting List (Continued)

Page 426: IT3520_2520 User Manual

7 - 14 Reports and Lists

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

1.9 Confirming the Condition of Forwarding

The condition of Forwarding (after Forwarding is set) can be confirmed.

Before Starting Operations:� Only the Administrator can print out the Forwarding List.

Confirming the Condition of Forwarding

1. Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen, and touch [Rep. Print].

� Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9

2. Touch [Forward List].

3. Touch [Enter]. The Forward List is now printed.

� The list is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Page 427: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 7 - 15

Figure 7-9 Forward List Example

Page 428: IT3520_2520 User Manual

7 - 16 Reports and Lists

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 429: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 1

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting

SECTION 1 DISPLAY ICONS AND ALARM MESSAGES

This section describes the icons that indicate the current status of the unit operation,and the alarm messages that are displayed whenever an abnormality occurs.

1.1 Display Icons

The following icons will be displayed on the touch panel to indicate variousunit operations.

Table 8-1 Display Icons

Symbol Message Description

Dialing Now dialing the number.

Dial Wait Waiting to re-dial.

Copying Now copying.

ScanningNow scanning a document to transmit by facsimile.

Receiving Now receiving a facsimile.

Sending Now sending a facsimile.

Waiting for polling A document is waiting for polling transmission.

Bulletin Board A document is registered on the bulletin board.

Icons are displayed in this area of the screen.

Page 430: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 2 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

1.2 Alarm Messages

Use the following list of alarm messages and solutions to determine the bestremedy for a problem.

Received document There is a received document in the mailbox.

Auto RX mode off Automatic reception is off (Manual mode is on).

Printing Now printing.

Waiting to print A document is waiting to be printed.

Received PC data Now receiving data for the PC printer.

PC data in memory Data is retained for the PC printer.

Account operatingOperating by selecting the Account in the Account Administration mode.

No print paper Restock the recording paper.

No toner Replace the toner bottle.

Replace the drum The imaging unit needs to be replaced.

Periodic inspection It is time for periodic inspection to be done.

Memory RecallThere is a document available to perform Memory Recall.

Table 8-2 Alarm Messages

Messages Causes Countermeasure

Malfunction detected. Call for service.

There is a fault within the main unit.

Contact your dealer for service.

Properly close the section(s) indicated by the arrow(s).

A door on the main unit, or an optional part is not closed correctly.

Close the door indicated by the arrow(s).

Misfeed detected. Remove misfeed at �.

Print paper or document is jammed.

Remove the print paper or document from the indicated area.

Table 8-1 Display Icons (Continued)

Symbol Message Description

Page 431: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 3

Your account has reached its maximum copies allowed. Please call your administrator.

The number of copies made has reached the maximum value set by the administrator.

Ask the administrator to clear accumulated number of pages copied.Ask the administrator to change the setting for the maximum number of copied pages.

The selected copy job will exceed the maximum allowance. Job cannot be processed. Call your administrator.

Copying is impossible because the accumulated number of pages copied has reached the maximum set by the administrator.

Retry copying after resetting the mode.Ask the administrator to clear the number of accumulated number of copied pages.

Toner is low. The toner supply is running low.

Replace the toner bottle.

Please add toner. The toner has run out.

Replace the toner bottle.

Replace Image Unit. The life of the drum is exhausted.

Replace the Imaging Unit.

The Imaging Unit needs to be changed. Call you technical representative.

The life of the drum is exhausted.

Replace the Imaging Unit.

Install the Imaging Unit. The imaging unit (drum) is not installed.

Install the Imaging Unit.

The Exit Tray has reached its maximum capacity. Please remove all copies from the tray as indicated by the arrow(s).

The document tray is full of printed pages.

Remove the paper from the Exit Tray.

Image data has caused memory overflow. Your copy job has been canceled.

Memory is full. Retry copying after reducing the number of pages.Print out any documents waiting to be printed. This will free up memory space.

Table 8-2 Alarm Messages (Continued)

Messages Causes Countermeasure

Page 432: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 4 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Memory is full. Memory is full. Reserve for transmission after memory becomes available.Print out any documents waiting to be printed. This will free up memory space.

Setting operation cannot be made due to memory full.

Memory is full. Reserve for transmission after memory becomes available. Print out any documents waiting to be printed. This will free up memory space.

Original left on Glass. A page remains on the Book Scanner glass.

Remove the document from the Book Scanner glass.

Matching paper size is not available. Choose another paper size.

There is no appropriate paper in any cassette that meets the document size and scaling factor specified.

Select the paper.Load the proper size print paper.

Paper setting is not correct. Please set paper correctly.

There is no appropriate paper in any cassette that meets the document size and scaling factor specified.

Select the paper. Load the proper size print paper.

Matching paper size in not available. Please place matching paper size in Bypass Tray.

There is no appropriate paper in Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

Place the indicated size paper in Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

Auto Size mode cannot be used with the selected paper size. Please select a zoom ratio.

The scaling factor calculated from the selected paper size and document size is not within the proper range.

Set the proper scaling factor.Select the paper.

Replenish paper. The paper in the selected cassette.

Load print paper.

Table 8-2 Alarm Messages (Continued)

Messages Causes Countermeasure

Page 433: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 5

Please reposition original.

Document size could not be detected, due to the Sleep Mode being active.

Replace the original again. When Sleep Mode is active, cancel the Sleep Mode first, and then place the document.

Please remove paper in the Bypass Tray.

Paper remains on the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass tray.

Remove all paper remaining on the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

This mode cannot be selected in combination with the Interrupt Mode.

A function that does not accept an interruption is selected.

Reset the Interrupt mode or the function currently selected.

This mode cannot be selected in combination with the 2-sided Copy Mode.

A paper cassette with paper that cannot be printed on both sides is selected for 2-Sided copying.

Reselect the paper.Cancel 2-Sided Copying.

This mode cannot be selected in combination with the Duplexing Mode.

A paper cassette with paper that cannot be copied on both sides is selected after 2-Sided Copying is selected.

Reselect the paper.Cancel 2-Sided Copying.

This mode cannot be selected in combination with the Exclusive Paper Mode (i.e. envelope, OHP, etc.).

Stapling or 2-Sided Copying is selected after a cassette with thick paper or OHP sheets is selected.

Cancel the stapling or 2-Sided Copy function.Reselect the paper.

The selected position cannot be hole-punched. Cancel Hole-Punch mode or change the position.

Direction of the document and the selected position for the Hole-Punch is not proper.

Change the direction of the document. Change the Hole-Punch position. Cancel Hole-Punch mode.

Please remove all copies in the non-sort tray.

Paper remains in the non-sort tray.

Remove all paper from the non-sort tray.

Table 8-2 Alarm Messages (Continued)

Messages Causes Countermeasure

Page 434: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 6 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

This screen cannot be changed now. Select Interrupt Mode to change the application.

<Fax/Mail/Scan> is pressed while the copying function is active.

Press <Interrupt> to stop copying, then press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

Return the following number of originals to Document Feeder.

A paper jam has occurred while using the ADF for copying.

Return the indicated number of pages to the ADF.

Cannot interrupt this job (not enough free memory). Press Start to resume.

<Interrupt> is pressed, but interruption is unavailable because the memory capacity is insufficient.

Press <Start> to restart the copying operation prior to interruption.

Cannot interrupt this job :not enough free memory.

<Interrupt> is pressed, but interruption is unavailable because the memory capacity is insufficient.

Wait until memory becomes available.

Original Size cannot be detected. Re-select the paper size.

The document size could not be detected with the automatic paper mode.

Select the paper size.

Original size cannot be detected. Select Zoom.

The document size could not be detected with the automatic size mode.

Set the zoom ratio.Select a different paper size.

Original size cannot be detected. Enter the Original’s size.

The document size could not be detected.

Place the document again.Reselect the document size.Cancel the image repeating function.

Original size cannot be detected. Reposition original or cancel following modes:

The document size could not be detected.

Place the document again.Reselect the document size.Cancel the indicated functions.

Table 8-2 Alarm Messages (Continued)

Messages Causes Countermeasure

Page 435: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 7

1.3 Document Jam

Use the procedure shown to clear a document jam.

Before Starting Operations:� If the document becomes jammed, the touch panel displays a message: "Misfeed

detected. Remove misfeed at �." and shows the cover needed to be opened toremove the jam. Open the cover indicated at the arrow and remove the jam.

Jam in the Document Feeder Cover:

1. Pull the lever and lift the Document Feeder Cover.

2. Slowly withdraw the jammed sheet.

� If the document is wrapped around the roller, the page should be pulled out carefully. It may be possible to pull out the sheet from the back side of the document feeder.

3. Open the Document Guide Plate.

� If the document is jammed in the Document Guide side, pull the lever (the one that is at the front of the Document Guide) and open the Document Guide Plate.

Page 436: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 8 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

4. Slowly withdraw the jammed paper by turning the dial.

5. Lower the Document Feeder Cover.

Jam under the Document Feeder Tray:

1. Pull the lever and lift the Document Feeder Cover.

2. Holding the Document Feeder Tray by hand, slowly withdraw the jammed sheet by turning the dial.

Jam in the Document Feeder Cover: (Continued)

Page 437: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 9

Print Paper Jam

Use the following procedures to remove jammed print paper.

Before Starting Operations:� If print paper becomes jammed, the touch panel displays a message "A document is

jammed. Remove the document from �." , and indicates which cover needs to beopened. Open the cover indicated by an arrow, and remove the jammed paper.

If the Print Paper Frequently Jams:� Confirm how to install the print paper, storage conditions, and the print paper size, etc.

Refer to Section 9.1 Installing Print Paper in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-53.

If the Side Cover is Opened to Remove Jammed Paper:� Care should be taken if the imaging unit is needed to be withdrawn in order to remove

jammed paper. A toner spill may occur. Toner may ruin the working surface or yourclothes.

3. Lower the Document Feeder Tray, and close the Document Feeder Cover.

Jam under the Document Feeder Tray: (Continued)

Page 438: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 10 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Important Areas to Observe

The following areas guide the user to important machine areas.

Paper Jam at the Main Unit Side Cover:

1. Open the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

Caution!Do not touch the copper terminals locatedwithin the Side Cover, under the imagingunit.Doing so may cause failure due to staticdischarge.

Displays and Paper Jam PositionsThe handling procedure differs according to the position of the paper jam. Referto the appropriate page indicated for instructions on removing the jammed paper.

Page 439: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 11

2. Pull on the lever to open the Side Cover.

3. Slowly withdraw the jammed paper.

4. Close the Side Cover.

� If the jammed paper cannot be removed from the Side Cover:Pull out the paper cassette holdingthe paper supply that was used,then remove the jammed paperfrom the cassette side.

5. Close the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

Paper Jam at the Main Unit Side Cover:

Page 440: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 12 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Paper Jam at the Paper Cassette Side Cover:

1. Lift up on the lever to open the Side Cover.

2. Slowly withdraw the jammed paper.

3. Close the Side Cover.

� If the jammed paper cannot be removed from the Side Cover:Pull out the Universal Cassetteand remove the jammed paperfrom the cassette side.

Page 441: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 13

Paper Jam at the Large Capacity Cabinet Side Cover:

1. Lift up on the lever to open the Side Cover.

2. Slowly withdraw the jammed paper.

3. Close the Side Cover.

� If the jammed paper cannot be removed from the Side Cover:Pull out the Large CapacityCabinet and remove the jammedpaper from the cassette side.

Page 442: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 14 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Paper Jam at the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray:

1. Lift up on the lever and pull out the cover.

2. Slowly withdraw the jammed paper with pulling out the cover.

Paper Jam at the Side Cover:

1. Open the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

2. Lift up on the lever to open the Side Cover.

Page 443: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 15

3. Open the Paper Guide.

� The area around the fuser is very hot! Do not touch anything other than the jammed paper.

� Try to remove the jammed paper without removing the imaging unit, if possible. Doing so may cause the toner to spill.

� Never touch the Transfer Roller (black roller). Printed image quality may become poor.

4. Slowly withdraw the jammed paper.

� The area around the Fuser Unit is very hot! Extreme caution must be exercised when handling objects in this area.

5. Close the Paper Guide.

Paper Jam at the Side Cover: (Continued)

Transfer Roller

Page 444: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 16 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

6. Close the Side Cover.

7. Close the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

Paper Jam at the Finisher (optional):

1. Open the front cover.

2. Open the Finisher cover.

Paper Jam at the Side Cover: (Continued)

Page 445: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 17

3. Operate the levers and cogs [FN1 to FN5] which are shown on the touch panel, slowly withdraw the jammed paper.

� If the staple unit stopped on the way, move the staple unit to the back by rotating the cog. Then slowing withdraw the jammed paper.

� When the Hole Punch Kit is installed, first pull out the dust box [FN3.1] and then pull the lever [FN3].

4. If the jammed paper cannot be removed from the Finisher, slowly redraw the jammed paper from the exit tray while rotating the cog [FN6].

5. Close the Finisher cover.

Paper Jam at the Finisher (optional):

FN1

FN2

FN3

FN4

FN5

Page 446: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 18 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

6. Close the front cover.

Paper Jam at the 2-Sided Print Unit (optional):

1. Open the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

2. Open the cover of the 2-Sided Print Unit.

3. Slowly withdraw the jammed paper.

Paper Jam at the Finisher (optional):

Page 447: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 19

4. Close the 2-Sided Print Unit cover.

5. Close the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

Paper Jam at the Mail-Bin Kit (optional):

1. Pull the lever.

2. Open the cover [FN8].

Paper Jam at the 2-Sided Print Unit (optional):

Page 448: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 20 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3. Slowly withdraw the jammed paper. If the jammed paper cannot be removed from the cover [FN8], withdraw the jammed paper from the downside while hold the lever [FN7].

4. Close the cover [FN8].

Paper Jam at the Saddle/Folding Kit (optional):

1. Open the front door.

2. Turn dial "FN5" or dial "FN6", and then pull out any misfed paper.

Paper Jam at the Mail-Bin Kit (optional):

FN7

Page 449: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 21

3. Remove all paper from the paper output tray.

4. Open the misfeed-clearing door, and then pull out any misfed paper.

5. Close the misfeed-clearing door.

6. Close the front door.

Paper Jam at the Saddle/Folding Kit (optional):

Page 450: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 22 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

SECTION 2 TROUBLESHOOTING

If trouble develops with the NEC IT3520/IT2520, follow the appropriate instructionsdescribed in this section. If these measures fail to resolve the problem, contact yourdealer’s service center.

During the Stand-by Mode

Condition Cause Countermeasure

Touch panel is blank.

Power plug at wall outlet is disconnected.

Connect the power cord at the wall outlet.

Power switch is off. Turn on the power switch.

Touch panel does not light. Press any key on the panel. The time-out period can be adjusted to run off the Touch Panel LCD.

The thermostat inside the unit has activated due to excessive heat within the product, or electrical interference due to thunderstorms, etc.

Turn off the power switch and wait a few minutes to restore power.

The panel contrast is set too dark.

Adjust the panel contrast setting.

Start key does not light green.

The account has not been selected (when the Account Management mode is activated).

Select an account.

Power cannot be turned on.

Power cord is disconnected from wall outlet.

Connect the power cord at the wall outlet.

The circuit breaker supplying power to the wall outlet is tripped.

Reset the circuit breaker.

Slow reduction in voltage. Power failure occurs.

Turn off the power switch and wait a few minutes before restoring power.

Page 451: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 23

Copying

Condition Cause Countermeasure

The document is not scanned.

The document is too thick. Use book scanner to copy.

The document is too thin, or too small.

Use book scanner to copy.

Document scanning area is dirty.

Clean the document scanning area.

Unit cuts off during a copy procedure.

The wall outlet cannot supply the rated power for this unit.

Be sure to use a wall outlet whose power rating is suitable for this unit. Electrical installation work is required if a suitable wall outlet is not available.

Copies are blank.

The document is placed face down (for the ADF).

Place the document face up and retry copying.

Copy is too faint.

The copy density setting is inappropriate.

Adjust the copy density setting.Adjust the contrast priority level on the copy setting.

Too many photos or dark documents are copied consecutively.

Use the Toner Replenisher key to replenish the toner supply.Copying immediately after

replacing the toner bottle.

Toner is running low. Replace the toner bottle.

Paper is damp. Replace the paper supply.

Copy is too dark.

The copy density setting is inappropriate.

Adjust the copy density setting.Adjust the contrast priority level on the copy setting.

Document scanning area is dirty.

Clean the scanning area.

Document is not flush with the glass surface (on Book Scanner).

Reset the document as close to the glass as possible.

Page 452: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 24 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

Streaky lines appear on the copies.

-OR-

The copies appear shaded.

The document scanning surface, or document pad is dirty.

Clean the scanned surface, or the document pad.

Transparent documents, such as OHP, are being copied.

Place a blank sheet of white paper on the document during copying.

A very thin document with print on both sides is being copied.

Due to the thin paper’s transparency, the back side print may show. Reduce the the density level and retry.

The periphery of the copied area is shaded.

The document pad is dirty. Clean the document pad.

The print paper selected is larger than the origianl document (when direct mode x 1.000 is used for copying).

Manually select the same sized paper as the original document.Use the appropriate scaling factor to enlarge the document being copied.

The document size and paper direction are different (when direct mode x 1.000 is used for copying).

Manually select the same sized paper as the original document.Reset the paper in the same direction as the original document.

The appropriate reduction size is not selected.

Select the appropriate reduction size to suit the paper.

Copying (Continued)

Condition Cause Countermeasure

Page 453: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 25

The copied image is skewed.

The document guide plate has not been adjusted properly.

Adjust the document guide plate to match the original document’s paper width.

The document is not placed correctly on the scanning glass.

Place the document on the glass surface using the scale mark.

Dirt or dust on the glass surface is causing trouble (when the 2-Sided Document Feeder is used).

Clean the glass surface thoroughly.

The paper is not placed correctly in the cassette.

Line up the edges of the paper with the guides on the cassette.

The copied image has folds.

The paper is not placed correctly in the cassette.

Line up the edges of the paper with the guides on the cassette.

The paper is curled or damp. Replace the paper.

The Copy function cannot be set.

The Interrupt mode is on. When the lamp for the Interrupt key lights, the interruption mode is on. Press the <Interrupt> key to reset the function.

Transmission

Condition Cause Countermeasure

The document is not scanned.

The document is too thick. Use the Book Scanner for transmission.

The document is too thin, or too small.

Use the Book Scanner for transmission.

The scanning area is dirty. Clean the scanning area.

The document is skewed during scanning.

The document guide plate is not adjusted properly to the width of the document.

Adjust the document guide plate to the match the document width.

Copying (Continued)

Condition Cause Countermeasure

Page 454: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 26 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

The image received at the receiver is not clear.

The document is not set correctly.

Set the document correctly.

The scanning area is dirty. Clean the scanning area.

The original document is too light.

Adjust the contrast that is appropriate for the document.

There is a problem with the telephone line connection, or with the receiving facsimile.

Make a copy with this unit. If the copy is clear, try to resent the document to the receiver.

A blank sheet is printed at the receiving station.

The document was placed face down in the ADF.

Place the document face up in the ADF and resend.

Automatic transmission is impossible.

The number is wrong. Confirm the facsimile number.

The number is a voice number. Confirm the facsimile number.

There is a problem at the receiving end (such as, paper out, toner out, memory full, power off, etc.).

Contact the receiving end and check for trouble.

TX Marker is too light.

The Marker is becoming dry. Replace the stamp.

Reception

Condition Cause Countermeasure

The received image is not clear.

Approved print paper is not being used.

Only use quality copy paper.

The paper is damp. Replace the paper supply.

Toner has run out. Replace the toner bottle.

There is a telephone line problem, or with the sending end.

Make a copy on this unit. If the copy is clear, contact the sending side to check for trouble.

Transmission (Continued)

Condition Cause Countermeasure

Page 455: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 27

SECTION 3 POWER FAILURE

This section describes how to take action in case of a power failure.

3.1 Documents in Memory are Retained for 12 Hours

Transmitted and received documents that are being stored in memory areretained for approximately 12 hours after power is interrupted (provided thatthe power to the product has been turned on for at least 24 hours prior to thepower failure). After 12 hours, the data is subject to being erased.

If any documents are lost during a power failure, a Power Failure Report willbe printed once power is restored to the unit. This report can be used toconfirm the number and destinations of any erased facsimiles.

� Refer to Setting the Memory Clear Report and TX Report for Serial Broadcast (Mode 002) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-66.

A blank page is printed on the print paper at this unit.

Toner supply is out.

The document was not placed correctly at the sending end.

Replace the toner bottle.

Contact the sending end.

Automatic Reception is impossible.

The unit is in the Manual Reception mode.

Set the Automatic Reception mode.

Memory is full. If paper has run out, replace the paper supply to print out the document stored in memory.

An alarm is displayed. Follow the troubleshooting instructions to reset the alarm.

Streaks appear on the received copy.

There is a problem with the telephone line, or the sending side.

Make a copy at this unit. If the copy is clear, contact the sending side to check for trouble.

Reception (Continued)

Condition Cause Countermeasure

Page 456: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 28 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3.2 Registered Items are Retained

Registered data such as date, time, registered facsimile numbers, passwords,management information, user registration, etc. are retained regardless of thepower failure duration. This data is stored using another battery and re-registration of data is unnecessary.

SECTION 4 DEHUMIDIFY FUNCTION

Condensation may build up around the scanning area and optics inside the unit whenrapid temperature changes occur. This moisture can accumulate and cause imagequality to degrade.

This section describes how the dehumidify (condensation) function can be set toprevent this problem from occurring.

Dehumidify Procedure:

� The lamp in the document scanning area lights for five minutes. This willevaporate any moisture inside the scanning area.

Dehumidify Function:

� This function can be set to automatically turn on at a set time every day. Enter thetime using the 24-hour clock.

Figure 8-1 Memory Clear Report Example

Page 457: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 29

Dehumidify Procedure

1. Press <Utility>, and touch [User Management].

2. Touch [Dehumidify]. The moisture inside the scanning area now begins to evaporate.

3. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Setting the Scanner Dry Function

1. Press <Utility>.

2. Touch [User Set].

Page 458: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 30 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

3. Touch [User’s Choice].

4. Select tab [5/6] and touch [Scanner Dry].

5. Enter the start time to begin the procedure, then touch [Enter].

� To Select:Touch [Hour] or [Minute], and thenenter the time using the 10-keyPad. When [Cancel] is touched,the function is deactivated.

� To re-enter:Press <C> to clear, and re-enter.

6. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Setting the Scanner Dry Function (Continued)

Page 459: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual 8 - 31

SECTION 5 TONER REPLENISHMENT

The printing may temporarily become faint after printing large areas of dark, or a largeamount of photos. In cases such as these, the toner supply can be manuallyreplenished to improve the print quality.

Before Starting Operations:� Do not turn off the power and open the side cover while the toner is being replenished.

� Only replenish the toner if the copy appears faint.

Toner Replenishment Procedure

1. Press <Utility>, and touch [User Management].

2. Touch [Toner Replenisher].

The unit’s toner supply isreplenished.

3. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Page 460: IT3520_2520 User Manual

8 - 32 Troubleshooting

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 461: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual A - 1

Appendix A Glossary of Terms

This glossary is provided to help define terms used throughout this documentation.

Term Definition

Automatic Document Feeder A mechanism that automatically feeds a number of document pages, one after the other. ADFs can feed single-sided or double-sided pages, depending on the design.

Batch Transmission This feature provides convenience and cost savings. The destination’s facsimile number and a timer are registered in a program key. All throughout the work day, documents bound for the registered destination are stored into memory, rather than being transmitted one-by-one. When the registered time is met, all the stored documents are then sent during one call. This can save on costly telephone charges, if the registered timer is set for after-peak hour times.

Bound Document A bound document is one that has its pages attached, stitched, or glued together such that the individual pages will not come loose. Examples include: books, magazines, reports, proposals, and catalogs. When copies or faxes of these documents are needed, it requires a book scanner rather than an ADF.

Book Scanner A mechanism that scans bound document pages for making copies or faxing.

Bulletin Board When a mail box is established in the memory and information is assigned, the information can be disclosed to anyone who wants to read it.

Dialing A telephone or facsimile number can be dialed via one of the following methods: 10-key Pad dialing, One-touch keys, and Program keys.

F-CODE This function provides a facsimile communication function using codes such as Sub-Address (SUB), Selective Polling (SEP), and Password (PWD) defined in the G3 Standards of the ITU-T. The F-CODE enables confidential transmission and bulletin communications between facsimiles that support F-CODE protocol.

Page 462: IT3520_2520 User Manual

A - 2 Glossary of Terms

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

G3 Communications Communications that conforms to G3 standard (International Standards for Facsimile Communications). A facsimile communication via the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).

2nd G3 Port An optional G3 facsimile port allowing simultaneous communication (sending and receiving) on both lines. For example:• Transmission/Transmission• Transmission/Reception• Reception/Reception

ITU-T Acronym for the International Telecommunications Union. This group used to be called the CCITT, and is responsible for standardizing facsimile communications.

JBIG Coding A new method of data compression/decompression standardized by the Joint Bilevel Image Expert Group, a subcommittee of the ITU-T. JBIG is a very effective coding method for transferring large and high resolution image data, such as grayscale (GSR) images and photos.

Manual Reception/Transmission

The ability for the operator to send and receive a facsimile after answering and speaking on the telephone.

Memory The device(s) in a facsimile that stores image data. Generally speaking, the larger the memory size means that more image data (pages) can be stored. Memory is also used by the printing function, if the facsimile unit has a PC printing ability.

Memory Reception If the print paper runs out during a facsimile reception, the image data is automatically stored into memory, and then printed when the paper supply is replaced. Likewise, if the facsimile develops a paper jam, or runs out of toner, the received document will be stored into memory until the problem is resolved.

On-hook Dialing This feature offers dialing without lifting the telephone handset. The machine’s speaker is activated so the operator can hear if the destination’s facsimile number is busy, or if the line is connected to a live operator.

Private Branch Exchange (PBX)

A PBX is telephone system equipment that is installed in a company to connect a large number of telephone sets incorporating multiple station lines for advanced telephone operations. Items like voice processing, direct inward dialing, and automated attendant features are available via a PBX.

Push Button Signal A dialing signal used on a telephone line consisting of two sets of frequency tones combining together. The resulting tone is decoded, by the telephone equipment, as a dialed digit. By touching [Tone], the touchtone (PB) line becomes available even if a dial phone line (DP 10 pps, DP 20 pps) is connected.

Term Definition

Page 463: IT3520_2520 User Manual

NEC IT Series Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual A - 3

Quick Memory Transmission A feature which dials a facsimile telephone number immediately after the first document page is scanned. The remaining pages continue to scan into memory while the pages already stored are sent. Many facsimile machines wait to dial a destination number after all the document is stored.

Super G3 High-speed facsimile transmission mode via the PSTN and adopted by the ITU-T. Using the V.34 facsimile modem and the JBIG coding method, it is possible to send a ITU-T test chart (similar to a typical one-page text letter) in under three seconds.

Term Definition

Page 464: IT3520_2520 User Manual

A - 4 Glossary of Terms

Issue 2 NEC IT Series

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 465: IT3520_2520 User Manual

Operations Manual

NEC America, Inc.

Document Solutions

Issue 2

CC56001

NEC IT3520/IT2520

ND-100059(E)

December 2003